6572 lines
303 KiB
XML
6572 lines
303 KiB
XML
|
||
<!DOCTYPE book PUBLIC "-//OASIS//DTD DocBook XML V4.0//EN"
|
||
"http://www.oasis-open.org/docbook/xml/4.0/docbookx.dtd">
|
||
|
||
<!-- File: $Id: Bv9ARM-book.xml,v 1.155.2.27.2.49 2004/08/16 00:55:29 marka Exp $ -->
|
||
|
||
<book>
|
||
<title>BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual</title>
|
||
|
||
<bookinfo>
|
||
<copyright>
|
||
<year>2004</year>
|
||
<holder>Internet Systems Consortium, Inc. ("ISC")</holder>
|
||
</copyright>
|
||
<copyright>
|
||
<year>2000-2003</year>
|
||
<holder>Internet Software Consortium</holder>
|
||
</copyright>
|
||
</bookinfo>
|
||
|
||
<chapter id="ch01">
|
||
<title>Introduction </title>
|
||
<para>The Internet Domain Name System (<acronym>DNS</acronym>) consists of the syntax
|
||
to specify the names of entities in the Internet in a hierarchical
|
||
manner, the rules used for delegating authority over names, and the
|
||
system implementation that actually maps names to Internet
|
||
addresses. <acronym>DNS</acronym> data is maintained in a group of distributed
|
||
hierarchical databases.</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>Scope of Document</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The Berkeley Internet Name Domain (<acronym>BIND</acronym>) implements an
|
||
domain name server for a number of operating systems. This
|
||
document provides basic information about the installation and
|
||
care of the Internet Software Consortium (<acronym>ISC</acronym>)
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> version 9 software package for system
|
||
administrators.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>This version of the manual corresponds to BIND version 9.3.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1><title>Organization of This Document</title>
|
||
<para>In this document, <emphasis>Section 1</emphasis> introduces
|
||
the basic <acronym>DNS</acronym> and <acronym>BIND</acronym> concepts. <emphasis>Section 2</emphasis>
|
||
describes resource requirements for running <acronym>BIND</acronym> in various
|
||
environments. Information in <emphasis>Section 3</emphasis> is
|
||
<emphasis>task-oriented</emphasis> in its presentation and is
|
||
organized functionally, to aid in the process of installing the
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 software. The task-oriented section is followed by
|
||
<emphasis>Section 4</emphasis>, which contains more advanced
|
||
concepts that the system administrator may need for implementing
|
||
certain options. <emphasis>Section 5</emphasis>
|
||
describes the <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 lightweight
|
||
resolver. The contents of <emphasis>Section 6</emphasis> are
|
||
organized as in a reference manual to aid in the ongoing
|
||
maintenance of the software. <emphasis>Section 7
|
||
</emphasis>addresses security considerations, and
|
||
<emphasis>Section 8</emphasis> contains troubleshooting help. The
|
||
main body of the document is followed by several
|
||
<emphasis>Appendices</emphasis> which contain useful reference
|
||
information, such as a <emphasis>Bibliography</emphasis> and
|
||
historic information related to <acronym>BIND</acronym> and the Domain Name
|
||
System.</para>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1><title>Conventions Used in This Document</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>In this document, we use the following general typographic
|
||
conventions:</para>
|
||
|
||
<informaltable>
|
||
<tgroup cols = "2">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colwidth = "3.000in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colwidth = "2.625in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<entry colname = "1">
|
||
<para><emphasis>To
|
||
describe:</emphasis></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2">
|
||
<para><emphasis>We use the style:</emphasis></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<entry colname = "1">
|
||
<para>a pathname, filename, URL, hostname,
|
||
mailing list name, or new term or concept</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><filename>Fixed width</filename></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>literal user
|
||
input</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><userinput>Fixed Width Bold</userinput></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>program output</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><computeroutput>Fixed Width</computeroutput></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup>
|
||
</informaltable>
|
||
|
||
<para>The following conventions are used in descriptions of the
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> configuration file:<informaltable colsep = "0" frame = "all" rowsep = "0">
|
||
<tgroup cols = "2" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"
|
||
tgroupstyle = "2Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.000in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "2.625in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1" colsep = "1" rowsep = "1"><para><emphasis>To
|
||
describe:</emphasis></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2" rowsep = "1"><para><emphasis>We use the style:</emphasis></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1" colsep = "1" rowsep = "1"><para>keywords</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2" rowsep = "1"><para><literal>Fixed Width</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1" colsep = "1" rowsep = "1"><para>variables</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2" rowsep = "1"><para><varname>Fixed Width</varname></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1" colsep = "1"><para>Optional input</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><optional>Text is enclosed in square brackets</optional></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable></para></sect1>
|
||
<sect1><title>The Domain Name System (<acronym>DNS</acronym>)</title>
|
||
<para>The purpose of this document is to explain the installation
|
||
and upkeep of the <acronym>BIND</acronym> software package, and we
|
||
begin by reviewing the fundamentals of the Domain Name System
|
||
(<acronym>DNS</acronym>) as they relate to <acronym>BIND</acronym>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>DNS Fundamentals</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The Domain Name System (DNS) is the hierarchical, distributed
|
||
database. It stores information for mapping Internet host names to IP
|
||
addresses and vice versa, mail routing information, and other data
|
||
used by Internet applications.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Clients look up information in the DNS by calling a
|
||
<emphasis>resolver</emphasis> library, which sends queries to one or
|
||
more <emphasis>name servers</emphasis> and interprets the responses.
|
||
The <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 software distribution contains a
|
||
name server, <command>named</command>, and two resolver
|
||
libraries, <command>liblwres</command> and <command>libbind</command>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2><sect2>
|
||
<title>Domains and Domain Names</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The data stored in the DNS is identified by <emphasis>domain
|
||
names</emphasis> that are organized as a tree according to
|
||
organizational or administrative boundaries. Each node of the tree,
|
||
called a <emphasis>domain</emphasis>, is given a label. The domain name of the
|
||
node is the concatenation of all the labels on the path from the
|
||
node to the <emphasis>root</emphasis> node. This is represented
|
||
in written form as a string of labels listed from right to left and
|
||
separated by dots. A label need only be unique within its parent
|
||
domain.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For example, a domain name for a host at the
|
||
company <emphasis>Example, Inc.</emphasis> could be
|
||
<literal>mail.example.com</literal>,
|
||
where <literal>com</literal> is the
|
||
top level domain to which
|
||
<literal>ourhost.example.com</literal> belongs,
|
||
<literal>example</literal> is
|
||
a subdomain of <literal>com</literal>, and
|
||
<literal>ourhost</literal> is the
|
||
name of the host.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For administrative purposes, the name space is partitioned into
|
||
areas called <emphasis>zones</emphasis>, each starting at a node and
|
||
extending down to the leaf nodes or to nodes where other zones start.
|
||
The data for each zone is stored in a <emphasis>name
|
||
server</emphasis>, which answers queries about the zone using the
|
||
<emphasis>DNS protocol</emphasis>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The data associated with each domain name is stored in the
|
||
form of <emphasis>resource records</emphasis> (<acronym>RR</acronym>s).
|
||
Some of the supported resource record types are described in
|
||
<xref linkend="types_of_resource_records_and_when_to_use_them"/>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For more detailed information about the design of the DNS and
|
||
the DNS protocol, please refer to the standards documents listed in
|
||
<xref linkend="rfcs"/>.</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title>Zones</title>
|
||
<para>To properly operate a name server, it is important to understand
|
||
the difference between a <emphasis>zone</emphasis>
|
||
and a <emphasis>domain</emphasis>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>As we stated previously, a zone is a point of delegation in
|
||
the <acronym>DNS</acronym> tree. A zone consists of
|
||
those contiguous parts of the domain
|
||
tree for which a name server has complete information and over which
|
||
it has authority. It contains all domain names from a certain point
|
||
downward in the domain tree except those which are delegated to
|
||
other zones. A delegation point is marked by one or more
|
||
<emphasis>NS records</emphasis> in the
|
||
parent zone, which should be matched by equivalent NS records at
|
||
the root of the delegated zone.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For instance, consider the <literal>example.com</literal>
|
||
domain which includes names
|
||
such as <literal>host.aaa.example.com</literal> and
|
||
<literal>host.bbb.example.com</literal> even though
|
||
the <literal>example.com</literal> zone includes
|
||
only delegations for the <literal>aaa.example.com</literal> and
|
||
<literal>bbb.example.com</literal> zones. A zone can map
|
||
exactly to a single domain, but could also include only part of a
|
||
domain, the rest of which could be delegated to other
|
||
name servers. Every name in the <acronym>DNS</acronym> tree is a
|
||
<emphasis>domain</emphasis>, even if it is
|
||
<emphasis>terminal</emphasis>, that is, has no
|
||
<emphasis>subdomains</emphasis>. Every subdomain is a domain and
|
||
every domain except the root is also a subdomain. The terminology is
|
||
not intuitive and we suggest that you read RFCs 1033, 1034 and 1035 to
|
||
gain a complete understanding of this difficult and subtle
|
||
topic.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Though <acronym>BIND</acronym> is called a "domain name server",
|
||
it deals primarily in terms of zones. The master and slave
|
||
declarations in the <filename>named.conf</filename> file specify
|
||
zones, not domains. When you ask some other site if it is willing to
|
||
be a slave server for your <emphasis>domain</emphasis>, you are
|
||
actually asking for slave service for some collection of zones.</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title>Authoritative Name Servers</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Each zone is served by at least
|
||
one <emphasis>authoritative name server</emphasis>,
|
||
which contains the complete data for the zone.
|
||
To make the DNS tolerant of server and network failures,
|
||
most zones have two or more authoritative servers.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Responses from authoritative servers have the "authoritative
|
||
answer" (AA) bit set in the response packets. This makes them
|
||
easy to identify when debugging DNS configurations using tools like
|
||
<command>dig</command> (<xref linkend="diagnostic_tools"/>).</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>The Primary Master</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The authoritative server where the master copy of the zone data is maintained is
|
||
called the <emphasis>primary master</emphasis> server, or simply the
|
||
<emphasis>primary</emphasis>. It loads the zone contents from some
|
||
local file edited by humans or perhaps generated mechanically from
|
||
some other local file which is edited by humans. This file is called
|
||
the <emphasis>zone file</emphasis> or <emphasis>master file</emphasis>.</para>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>Slave Servers</title>
|
||
<para>The other authoritative servers, the <emphasis>slave</emphasis>
|
||
servers (also known as <emphasis>secondary</emphasis> servers) load
|
||
the zone contents from another server using a replication process
|
||
known as a <emphasis>zone transfer</emphasis>. Typically the data are
|
||
transferred directly from the primary master, but it is also possible
|
||
to transfer it from another slave. In other words, a slave server
|
||
may itself act as a master to a subordinate slave server.</para>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>Stealth Servers</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Usually all of the zone's authoritative servers are listed in
|
||
NS records in the parent zone. These NS records constitute
|
||
a <emphasis>delegation</emphasis> of the zone from the parent.
|
||
The authoritative servers are also listed in the zone file itself,
|
||
at the <emphasis>top level</emphasis> or <emphasis>apex</emphasis>
|
||
of the zone. You can list servers in the zone's top-level NS
|
||
records that are not in the parent's NS delegation, but you cannot
|
||
list servers in the parent's delegation that are not present at
|
||
the zone's top level.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>A <emphasis>stealth server</emphasis> is a server that is
|
||
authoritative for a zone but is not listed in that zone's NS
|
||
records. Stealth servers can be used for keeping a local copy of a
|
||
zone to speed up access to the zone's records or to make sure that the
|
||
zone is available even if all the "official" servers for the zone are
|
||
inaccessible.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>A configuration where the primary master server itself is a
|
||
stealth server is often referred to as a "hidden primary"
|
||
configuration. One use for this configuration is when the primary master
|
||
is behind a firewall and therefore unable to communicate directly
|
||
with the outside world.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
|
||
<title>Caching Name Servers</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The resolver libraries provided by most operating systems are
|
||
<emphasis>stub resolvers</emphasis>, meaning that they are not capable of
|
||
performing the full DNS resolution process by themselves by talking
|
||
directly to the authoritative servers. Instead, they rely on a local
|
||
name server to perform the resolution on their behalf. Such a server
|
||
is called a <emphasis>recursive</emphasis> name server; it performs
|
||
<emphasis>recursive lookups</emphasis> for local clients.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>To improve performance, recursive servers cache the results of
|
||
the lookups they perform. Since the processes of recursion and
|
||
caching are intimately connected, the terms
|
||
<emphasis>recursive server</emphasis> and
|
||
<emphasis>caching server</emphasis> are often used synonymously.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The length of time for which a record may be retained in
|
||
in the cache of a caching name server is controlled by the
|
||
Time To Live (TTL) field associated with each resource record.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>Forwarding</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Even a caching name server does not necessarily perform
|
||
the complete recursive lookup itself. Instead, it can
|
||
<emphasis>forward</emphasis> some or all of the queries
|
||
that it cannot satisfy from its cache to another caching name server,
|
||
commonly referred to as a <emphasis>forwarder</emphasis>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>There may be one or more forwarders,
|
||
and they are queried in turn until the list is exhausted or an answer
|
||
is found. Forwarders are typically used when you do not
|
||
wish all the servers at a given site to interact directly with the rest of
|
||
the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number
|
||
of internal <acronym>DNS</acronym> servers and an Internet firewall. Servers unable
|
||
to pass packets through the firewall would forward to the server
|
||
that can do it, and that server would query the Internet <acronym>DNS</acronym> servers
|
||
on the internal server's behalf. An added benefit of using the forwarding
|
||
feature is that the central machine develops a much more complete
|
||
cache of information that all the clients can take advantage
|
||
of.</para>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title>Name Servers in Multiple Roles</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <acronym>BIND</acronym> name server can simultaneously act as
|
||
a master for some zones, a slave for other zones, and as a caching
|
||
(recursive) server for a set of local clients.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>However, since the functions of authoritative name service
|
||
and caching/recursive name service are logically separate, it is
|
||
often advantageous to run them on separate server machines.
|
||
|
||
A server that only provides authoritative name service
|
||
(an <emphasis>authoritative-only</emphasis> server) can run with
|
||
recursion disabled, improving reliability and security.
|
||
|
||
A server that is not authoritative for any zones and only provides
|
||
recursive service to local
|
||
clients (a <emphasis>caching-only</emphasis> server)
|
||
does not need to be reachable from the Internet at large and can
|
||
be placed inside a firewall.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
|
||
</chapter>
|
||
|
||
<chapter id="ch02"><title><acronym>BIND</acronym> Resource Requirements</title>
|
||
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>Hardware requirements</title>
|
||
|
||
<para><acronym>DNS</acronym> hardware requirements have traditionally been quite modest.
|
||
For many installations, servers that have been pensioned off from
|
||
active duty have performed admirably as <acronym>DNS</acronym> servers.</para>
|
||
<para>The DNSSEC and IPv6 features of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 may prove to be quite
|
||
CPU intensive however, so organizations that make heavy use of these
|
||
features may wish to consider larger systems for these applications.
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 is fully multithreaded, allowing full utilization of
|
||
multiprocessor systems for installations that need it.</para></sect1>
|
||
<sect1><title>CPU Requirements</title>
|
||
<para>CPU requirements for <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 range from i486-class machines
|
||
for serving of static zones without caching, to enterprise-class
|
||
machines if you intend to process many dynamic updates and DNSSEC
|
||
signed zones, serving many thousands of queries per second.</para></sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1><title>Memory Requirements</title>
|
||
<para>The memory of the server has to be large enough to fit the
|
||
cache and zones loaded off disk. The <command>max-cache-size</command>
|
||
option can be used to limit the amount of memory used by the cache,
|
||
at the expense of reducing cache hit rates and causing more <acronym>DNS</acronym>
|
||
traffic. It is still good practice to have enough memory to load
|
||
all zone and cache data into memory — unfortunately, the best way
|
||
to determine this for a given installation is to watch the name server
|
||
in operation. After a few weeks the server process should reach
|
||
a relatively stable size where entries are expiring from the cache as
|
||
fast as they are being inserted.</para></sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1><title>Name Server Intensive Environment Issues</title>
|
||
<para>For name server intensive environments, there are two alternative
|
||
configurations that may be used. The first is where clients and
|
||
any second-level internal name servers query a main name server, which
|
||
has enough memory to build a large cache. This approach minimizes
|
||
the bandwidth used by external name lookups. The second alternative
|
||
is to set up second-level internal name servers to make queries independently.
|
||
In this configuration, none of the individual machines needs to
|
||
have as much memory or CPU power as in the first alternative, but
|
||
this has the disadvantage of making many more external queries,
|
||
as none of the name servers share their cached data.</para></sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1><title>Supported Operating Systems</title>
|
||
<para>ISC <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 compiles and runs on a large number
|
||
of Unix-like operating system and on Windows NT / 2000. For an up-to-date
|
||
list of supported systems, see the README file in the top level directory
|
||
of the BIND 9 source distribution.</para>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
</chapter>
|
||
|
||
<chapter id="ch03">
|
||
<title>Name Server Configuration</title>
|
||
<para>In this section we provide some suggested configurations along
|
||
with guidelines for their use. We also address the topic of reasonable
|
||
option setting.</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="sample_configuration">
|
||
<title>Sample Configurations</title>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>A Caching-only Name Server</title>
|
||
<para>The following sample configuration is appropriate for a caching-only
|
||
name server for use by clients internal to a corporation. All queries
|
||
from outside clients are refused using the <command>allow-query</command>
|
||
option. Alternatively, the same effect could be achieved using suitable
|
||
firewall rules.</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
// Two corporate subnets we wish to allow queries from.
|
||
acl corpnets { 192.168.4.0/24; 192.168.7.0/24; };
|
||
options {
|
||
directory "/etc/namedb"; // Working directory
|
||
allow-query { corpnets; };
|
||
};
|
||
// Provide a reverse mapping for the loopback address 127.0.0.1
|
||
zone "0.0.127.in-addr.arpa" {
|
||
type master;
|
||
file "localhost.rev";
|
||
notify no;
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>An Authoritative-only Name Server</title>
|
||
<para>This sample configuration is for an authoritative-only server
|
||
that is the master server for "<filename>example.com</filename>"
|
||
and a slave for the subdomain "<filename>eng.example.com</filename>".</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
options {
|
||
directory "/etc/namedb"; // Working directory
|
||
allow-query { any; }; // This is the default
|
||
recursion no; // Do not provide recursive service
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
// Provide a reverse mapping for the loopback address 127.0.0.1
|
||
zone "0.0.127.in-addr.arpa" {
|
||
type master;
|
||
file "localhost.rev";
|
||
notify no;
|
||
};
|
||
// We are the master server for example.com
|
||
zone "example.com" {
|
||
type master;
|
||
file "example.com.db";
|
||
// IP addresses of slave servers allowed to transfer example.com
|
||
allow-transfer {
|
||
192.168.4.14;
|
||
192.168.5.53;
|
||
};
|
||
};
|
||
// We are a slave server for eng.example.com
|
||
zone "eng.example.com" {
|
||
type slave;
|
||
file "eng.example.com.bk";
|
||
// IP address of eng.example.com master server
|
||
masters { 192.168.4.12; };
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>Load Balancing</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>A primitive form of load balancing can be achieved in
|
||
the <acronym>DNS</acronym> by using multiple A records for one name.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For example, if you have three WWW servers with network addresses
|
||
of 10.0.0.1, 10.0.0.2 and 10.0.0.3, a set of records such as the
|
||
following means that clients will connect to each machine one third
|
||
of the time:</para>
|
||
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0">
|
||
<tgroup cols = "5" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "2Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.875in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.500in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "3" colnum = "3" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.750in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "4" colnum = "4" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.750in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "5" colnum = "5" colsep = "0" colwidth = "2.028in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>Name</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>TTL</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>CLASS</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para>TYPE</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para>Resource Record (RR) Data</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>www</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>600</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>IN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para><literal>10.0.0.1</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>600</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>IN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para><literal>10.0.0.2</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>600</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>IN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para><literal>10.0.0.3</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup>
|
||
</informaltable>
|
||
<para>When a resolver queries for these records, <acronym>BIND</acronym> will rotate
|
||
them and respond to the query with the records in a different
|
||
order. In the example above, clients will randomly receive
|
||
records in the order 1, 2, 3; 2, 3, 1; and 3, 1, 2. Most clients
|
||
will use the first record returned and discard the rest.</para>
|
||
<para>For more detail on ordering responses, check the
|
||
<command>rrset-order</command> substatement in the
|
||
<command>options</command> statement, see
|
||
<xref endterm="rrset_ordering_title" linkend="rrset_ordering"/>.
|
||
This substatement is not supported in
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, and only the ordering scheme described above is
|
||
available.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>Name Server Operations</title>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>Tools for Use With the Name Server Daemon</title>
|
||
<para>There are several indispensable diagnostic, administrative
|
||
and monitoring tools available to the system administrator for controlling
|
||
and debugging the name server daemon. We describe several in this
|
||
section </para>
|
||
<sect3 id="diagnostic_tools">
|
||
<title>Diagnostic Tools</title>
|
||
<para>The <command>dig</command>, <command>host</command>, and
|
||
<command>nslookup</command> programs are all command line tools
|
||
for manually querying name servers. They differ in style and
|
||
output format.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
<varlistentry>
|
||
<term id="dig"><command>dig</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>The domain information groper (<command>dig</command>)
|
||
is the most versatile and complete of these lookup tools.
|
||
It has two modes: simple interactive
|
||
mode for a single query, and batch mode which executes a query for
|
||
each in a list of several query lines. All query options are accessible
|
||
from the command line.</para>
|
||
<cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
|
||
<command>dig</command>
|
||
<arg>@<replaceable>server</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>domain</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg><replaceable>query-type</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg><replaceable>query-class</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>+<replaceable>query-option</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>-<replaceable>dig-option</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>%<replaceable>comment</replaceable></arg>
|
||
</cmdsynopsis>
|
||
<para>The usual simple use of dig will take the form</para>
|
||
<simpara><command>dig @server domain query-type query-class</command></simpara>
|
||
<para>For more information and a list of available commands and
|
||
options, see the <command>dig</command> man page.</para>
|
||
</listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry>
|
||
<term><command>host</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>The <command>host</command> utility emphasizes simplicity
|
||
and ease of use. By default, it converts
|
||
between host names and Internet addresses, but its functionality
|
||
can be extended with the use of options.</para>
|
||
<cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
|
||
<command>host</command>
|
||
<arg>-aCdlrTwv</arg>
|
||
<arg>-c <replaceable>class</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>-N <replaceable>ndots</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>-t <replaceable>type</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>-W <replaceable>timeout</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>-R <replaceable>retries</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>hostname</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg><replaceable>server</replaceable></arg>
|
||
</cmdsynopsis>
|
||
<para>For more information and a list of available commands and
|
||
options, see the <command>host</command> man page.</para>
|
||
</listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry>
|
||
<term><command>nslookup</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para><command>nslookup</command> has two modes: interactive
|
||
and non-interactive. Interactive mode allows the user to query name servers
|
||
for information about various hosts and domains or to print a list
|
||
of hosts in a domain. Non-interactive mode is used to print just
|
||
the name and requested information for a host or domain.</para>
|
||
<cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
|
||
<command>nslookup</command>
|
||
<arg rep="repeat">-option</arg>
|
||
<group>
|
||
<arg><replaceable>host-to-find</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>- <arg>server</arg></arg>
|
||
</group>
|
||
</cmdsynopsis>
|
||
<para>Interactive mode is entered when no arguments are given (the
|
||
default name server will be used) or when the first argument is a
|
||
hyphen (`-') and the second argument is the host name or Internet address
|
||
of a name server.</para>
|
||
<para>Non-interactive mode is used when the name or Internet address
|
||
of the host to be looked up is given as the first argument. The
|
||
optional second argument specifies the host name or address of a name server.</para>
|
||
<para>Due to its arcane user interface and frequently inconsistent
|
||
behavior, we do not recommend the use of <command>nslookup</command>.
|
||
Use <command>dig</command> instead.</para>
|
||
</listitem>
|
||
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="admin_tools">
|
||
<title>Administrative Tools</title>
|
||
<para>Administrative tools play an integral part in the management
|
||
of a server.</para>
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
<varlistentry id="named-checkconf" xreflabel="Named Configuration Checking application">
|
||
<term><command>named-checkconf</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>The <command>named-checkconf</command> program
|
||
checks the syntax of a <filename>named.conf</filename> file.</para>
|
||
<cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
|
||
<command>named-checkconf</command>
|
||
<arg>-t <replaceable>directory</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg><replaceable>filename</replaceable></arg>
|
||
</cmdsynopsis>
|
||
</listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
<varlistentry id="named-checkzone" xreflabel="Zone Checking application">
|
||
<term><command>named-checkzone</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>The <command>named-checkzone</command> program checks a master file for
|
||
syntax and consistency.</para>
|
||
<cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
|
||
<command>named-checkzone</command>
|
||
<arg>-dq</arg>
|
||
<arg>-c <replaceable>class</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>zone</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg><replaceable>filename</replaceable></arg>
|
||
</cmdsynopsis>
|
||
</listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
<varlistentry id="rndc" xreflabel="Remote Name Daemon Control application">
|
||
<term><command>rndc</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>The remote name daemon control
|
||
(<command>rndc</command>) program allows the system
|
||
administrator to control the operation of a name server.
|
||
If you run <command>rndc</command> without any options
|
||
it will display a usage message as follows:</para>
|
||
<cmdsynopsis label="Usage">
|
||
<command>rndc</command>
|
||
<arg>-c <replaceable>config</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>-s <replaceable>server</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>-p <replaceable>port</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg>-y <replaceable>key</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg choice="plain"><replaceable>command</replaceable></arg>
|
||
<arg rep="repeat"><replaceable>command</replaceable></arg>
|
||
</cmdsynopsis>
|
||
<para><command>command</command> is one of the following:</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>reload</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Reload configuration file and zones.</para></listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>reload <replaceable>zone</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Reload the given zone.</para></listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>refresh <replaceable>zone</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Schedule zone maintenance for the given zone.</para></listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>retransfer <replaceable>zone</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Retransfer the given zone from the master.</para></listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>freeze <replaceable>zone</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Suspend updates to a dynamic zone. This allows manual
|
||
edits to be made to a zone normally updated by dynamic update. It
|
||
also causes changes in the journal file to be synced into the master
|
||
and the journal file to be removed. All dynamic update attempts will
|
||
be refused while the zone is frozen.</para></listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>unfreeze <replaceable>zone</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>class</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>view</replaceable></optional></optional></userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Enable updates to a frozen dynamic zone. This causes
|
||
the server to reload the zone from disk, and re-enables dynamic updates
|
||
after the load has completed. After a zone is unfrozen, dynamic updates
|
||
will no longer be refused.</para></listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>reconfig</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Reload the configuration file and load new zones,
|
||
but do not reload existing zone files even if they have changed.
|
||
This is faster than a full <command>reload</command> when there
|
||
is a large number of zones because it avoids the need to examine the
|
||
modification times of the zones files.
|
||
</para></listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>stats</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Write server statistics to the statistics file.</para></listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>querylog</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Toggle query logging. Query logging can also be enabled
|
||
by explicitly directing the <command>queries</command>
|
||
<command>category</command> to a <command>channel</command> in the
|
||
<command>logging</command> section of
|
||
<filename>named.conf</filename>.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>dumpdb</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Dump the server's caches to the dump file. </para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>stop</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Stop the server,
|
||
making sure any recent changes
|
||
made through dynamic update or IXFR are first saved to the master files
|
||
of the updated zones.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>halt</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Stop the server immediately. Recent changes
|
||
made through dynamic update or IXFR are not saved to the master files,
|
||
but will be rolled forward from the journal files when the server
|
||
is restarted.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>trace</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Increment the servers debugging level by one. </para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>trace <replaceable>level</replaceable></userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Sets the server's debugging level to an explicit
|
||
value.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>notrace</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Sets the server's debugging level to 0.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>flush</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Flushes the server's cache.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><userinput>status</userinput></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Display status of the server.
|
||
Note the number of zones includes the internal <command>bind/CH</command> zone
|
||
and the default <command>./IN</command> hint zone if there is not a
|
||
explicit root zone configured.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<para>In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.2, <command>rndc</command>
|
||
supports all the commands of the BIND 8 <command>ndc</command>
|
||
utility except <command>ndc start</command> and
|
||
<command>ndc restart</command>, which were also
|
||
not supported in <command>ndc</command>'s channel mode.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>A configuration file is required, since all
|
||
communication with the server is authenticated with
|
||
digital signatures that rely on a shared secret, and
|
||
there is no way to provide that secret other than with a
|
||
configuration file. The default location for the
|
||
<command>rndc</command> configuration file is
|
||
<filename>/etc/rndc.conf</filename>, but an alternate
|
||
location can be specified with the <option>-c</option>
|
||
option. If the configuration file is not found,
|
||
<command>rndc</command> will also look in
|
||
<filename>/etc/rndc.key</filename> (or whatever
|
||
<varname>sysconfdir</varname> was defined when
|
||
the <acronym>BIND</acronym> build was configured).
|
||
The <filename>rndc.key</filename> file is generated by
|
||
running <command>rndc-confgen -a</command> as described in
|
||
<xref linkend="controls_statement_definition_and_usage"/>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The format of the configuration file is similar to
|
||
that of <filename>named.conf</filename>, but limited to
|
||
only four statements, the <command>options</command>,
|
||
<command>key</command>, <command>server</command> and
|
||
<command>include</command>
|
||
statements. These statements are what associate the
|
||
secret keys to the servers with which they are meant to
|
||
be shared. The order of statements is not
|
||
significant.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>options</command> statement has three clauses:
|
||
<command>default-server</command>, <command>default-key</command>,
|
||
and <command>default-port</command>.
|
||
<command>default-server</command> takes a
|
||
host name or address argument and represents the server that will
|
||
be contacted if no <option>-s</option>
|
||
option is provided on the command line.
|
||
<command>default-key</command> takes
|
||
the name of a key as its argument, as defined by a <command>key</command> statement.
|
||
<command>default-port</command> specifies the port to which
|
||
<command>rndc</command> should connect if no
|
||
port is given on the command line or in a
|
||
<command>server</command> statement.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>key</command> statement defines an key to be used
|
||
by <command>rndc</command> when authenticating with
|
||
<command>named</command>. Its syntax is identical to the
|
||
<command>key</command> statement in named.conf.
|
||
The keyword <userinput>key</userinput> is
|
||
followed by a key name, which must be a valid
|
||
domain name, though it need not actually be hierarchical; thus,
|
||
a string like "<userinput>rndc_key</userinput>" is a valid name.
|
||
The <command>key</command> statement has two clauses:
|
||
<command>algorithm</command> and <command>secret</command>.
|
||
While the configuration parser will accept any string as the argument
|
||
to algorithm, currently only the string "<userinput>hmac-md5</userinput>"
|
||
has any meaning. The secret is a base-64 encoded string.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>server</command> statement associates a key
|
||
defined using the <command>key</command> statement with a server.
|
||
The keyword <userinput>server</userinput> is followed by a
|
||
host name or address. The <command>server</command> statement
|
||
has two clauses: <command>key</command> and <command>port</command>.
|
||
The <command>key</command> clause specifies the name of the key
|
||
to be used when communicating with this server, and the
|
||
<command>port</command> clause can be used to
|
||
specify the port <command>rndc</command> should connect
|
||
to on the server.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>A sample minimal configuration file is as follows:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
key rndc_key {
|
||
algorithm "hmac-md5";
|
||
secret "c3Ryb25nIGVub3VnaCBmb3IgYSBtYW4gYnV0IG1hZGUgZm9yIGEgd29tYW4K";
|
||
};
|
||
options {
|
||
default-server 127.0.0.1;
|
||
default-key rndc_key;
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
<para>This file, if installed as <filename>/etc/rndc.conf</filename>,
|
||
would allow the command:</para>
|
||
|
||
<para><prompt>$ </prompt><userinput>rndc reload</userinput></para>
|
||
|
||
<para>to connect to 127.0.0.1 port 953 and cause the name server
|
||
to reload, if a name server on the local machine were running with
|
||
following controls statements:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
controls {
|
||
inet 127.0.0.1 allow { localhost; } keys { rndc_key; };
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>and it had an identical key statement for
|
||
<literal>rndc_key</literal>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Running the <command>rndc-confgen</command> program will
|
||
conveniently create a <filename>rndc.conf</filename>
|
||
file for you, and also display the
|
||
corresponding <command>controls</command> statement that you need to
|
||
add to <filename>named.conf</filename>. Alternatively,
|
||
you can run <command>rndc-confgen -a</command> to set up
|
||
a <filename>rndc.key</filename> file and not modify
|
||
<filename>named.conf</filename> at all.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
|
||
<title>Signals</title>
|
||
<para>Certain UNIX signals cause the name server to take specific
|
||
actions, as described in the following table. These signals can
|
||
be sent using the <command>kill</command> command.</para>
|
||
<informaltable frame = "all" ><tgroup cols = "2">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.125in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "4.000in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>SIGHUP</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Causes the server to read <filename>named.conf</filename> and
|
||
reload the database. </para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>SIGTERM</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Causes the server to clean up and exit.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1">
|
||
<para><command>SIGINT</command></para>
|
||
</entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Causes the server to clean up and exit.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup>
|
||
</informaltable>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
</chapter>
|
||
|
||
<chapter id="ch04">
|
||
<title>Advanced DNS Features</title>
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="notify">
|
||
|
||
<title>Notify</title>
|
||
<para><acronym>DNS</acronym> NOTIFY is a mechanism that allows master
|
||
servers to notify their slave servers of changes to a zone's data. In
|
||
response to a <command>NOTIFY</command> from a master server, the
|
||
slave will check to see that its version of the zone is the
|
||
current version and, if not, initiate a zone transfer.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para><acronym>DNS</acronym>
|
||
For more information about
|
||
<command>NOTIFY</command>, see the description of the
|
||
<command>notify</command> option in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/> and
|
||
the description of the zone option <command>also-notify</command> in
|
||
<xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>. The <command>NOTIFY</command>
|
||
protocol is specified in RFC 1996.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="dynamic_update">
|
||
<title>Dynamic Update</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Dynamic Update is a method for adding, replacing or deleting
|
||
records in a master server by sending it a special form of DNS
|
||
messages. The format and meaning of these messages is specified
|
||
in RFC 2136.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Dynamic update is enabled on a zone-by-zone basis, by
|
||
including an <command>allow-update</command> or
|
||
<command>update-policy</command> clause in the
|
||
<command>zone</command> statement.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Updating of secure zones (zones using DNSSEC) follows
|
||
RFC 3007: RRSIG and NSEC records affected by updates are automatically
|
||
regenerated by the server using an online zone key.
|
||
Update authorization is based
|
||
on transaction signatures and an explicit server policy.</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect2 id="journal">
|
||
<title>The journal file</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>All changes made to a zone using dynamic update are stored in the
|
||
zone's journal file. This file is automatically created by the
|
||
server when when the first dynamic update takes place. The name of
|
||
the journal file is formed by appending the
|
||
extension <filename>.jnl</filename> to the
|
||
name of the corresponding zone file. The journal file is in a
|
||
binary format and should not be edited manually.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The server will also occasionally write ("dump")
|
||
the complete contents of the updated zone to its zone file.
|
||
This is not done immediately after
|
||
each dynamic update, because that would be too slow when a large
|
||
zone is updated frequently. Instead, the dump is delayed by
|
||
up to 15 minutes, allowing additional updates to take place.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>When a server is restarted after a shutdown or crash, it will replay
|
||
the journal file to incorporate into the zone any updates that took
|
||
place after the last zone dump.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Changes that result from incoming incremental zone transfers are also
|
||
journalled in a similar way.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The zone files of dynamic zones cannot normally be edited by
|
||
hand because they are not guaranteed to contain the most recent
|
||
dynamic changes - those are only in the journal file.
|
||
The only way to ensure that the zone file of a dynamic zone
|
||
is up to date is to run <command>rndc stop</command>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>If you have to make changes to a dynamic zone
|
||
manually, the following procedure will work: Disable dynamic updates
|
||
to the zone using
|
||
<command>rndc freeze <replaceable>zone</replaceable></command>.
|
||
This will also remove the zone's <filename>.jnl</filename> file
|
||
and update the master file. Edit the zone file. Run
|
||
<command>rndc unfreeze <replaceable>zone</replaceable></command>
|
||
to reload the changed zone and re-enable dynamic updates.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="incremental_zone_transfers">
|
||
<title>Incremental Zone Transfers (IXFR)</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The incremental zone transfer (IXFR) protocol is a way for
|
||
slave servers to transfer only changed data, instead of having to
|
||
transfer the entire zone. The IXFR protocol is specified in RFC
|
||
1995. See <xref linkend="proposed_standards"/>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>When acting as a master, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9
|
||
supports IXFR for those zones
|
||
where the necessary change history information is available. These
|
||
include master zones maintained by dynamic update and slave zones
|
||
whose data was obtained by IXFR. For manually maintained master
|
||
zones, and for slave zones obtained by performing a full zone
|
||
transfer (AXFR), IXFR is supported only if the option
|
||
<command>ixfr-from-differences</command> is set
|
||
to <userinput>yes</userinput>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>When acting as a slave, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 will
|
||
attempt to use IXFR unless
|
||
it is explicitly disabled. For more information about disabling
|
||
IXFR, see the description of the <command>request-ixfr</command> clause
|
||
of the <command>server</command> statement.</para>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1><title>Split DNS</title>
|
||
<para>Setting up different views, or visibility, of the DNS space to
|
||
internal and external resolvers is usually referred to as a <emphasis>Split
|
||
DNS</emphasis> setup. There are several reasons an organization
|
||
would want to set up its DNS this way.</para>
|
||
<para>One common reason for setting up a DNS system this way is
|
||
to hide "internal" DNS information from "external" clients on the
|
||
Internet. There is some debate as to whether or not this is actually useful.
|
||
Internal DNS information leaks out in many ways (via email headers,
|
||
for example) and most savvy "attackers" can find the information
|
||
they need using other means.</para>
|
||
<para>Another common reason for setting up a Split DNS system is
|
||
to allow internal networks that are behind filters or in RFC 1918
|
||
space (reserved IP space, as documented in RFC 1918) to resolve DNS
|
||
on the Internet. Split DNS can also be used to allow mail from outside
|
||
back in to the internal network.</para>
|
||
<para>Here is an example of a split DNS setup:</para>
|
||
<para>Let's say a company named <emphasis>Example, Inc.</emphasis>
|
||
(<literal>example.com</literal>)
|
||
has several corporate sites that have an internal network with reserved
|
||
Internet Protocol (IP) space and an external demilitarized zone (DMZ),
|
||
or "outside" section of a network, that is available to the public.</para>
|
||
<para><emphasis>Example, Inc.</emphasis> wants its internal clients
|
||
to be able to resolve external hostnames and to exchange mail with
|
||
people on the outside. The company also wants its internal resolvers
|
||
to have access to certain internal-only zones that are not available
|
||
at all outside of the internal network.</para>
|
||
<para>In order to accomplish this, the company will set up two sets
|
||
of name servers. One set will be on the inside network (in the reserved
|
||
IP space) and the other set will be on bastion hosts, which are "proxy"
|
||
hosts that can talk to both sides of its network, in the DMZ.</para>
|
||
<para>The internal servers will be configured to forward all queries,
|
||
except queries for <filename>site1.internal</filename>, <filename>site2.internal</filename>, <filename>site1.example.com</filename>,
|
||
and <filename>site2.example.com</filename>, to the servers in the
|
||
DMZ. These internal servers will have complete sets of information
|
||
for <filename>site1.example.com</filename>, <filename>site2.example.com</filename>,<emphasis> </emphasis><filename>site1.internal</filename>,
|
||
and <filename>site2.internal</filename>.</para>
|
||
<para>To protect the <filename>site1.internal</filename> and <filename>site2.internal</filename> domains,
|
||
the internal name servers must be configured to disallow all queries
|
||
to these domains from any external hosts, including the bastion
|
||
hosts.</para>
|
||
<para>The external servers, which are on the bastion hosts, will
|
||
be configured to serve the "public" version of the <filename>site1</filename> and <filename>site2.example.com</filename> zones.
|
||
This could include things such as the host records for public servers
|
||
(<filename>www.example.com</filename> and <filename>ftp.example.com</filename>),
|
||
and mail exchange (MX) records (<filename>a.mx.example.com</filename> and <filename>b.mx.example.com</filename>).</para>
|
||
<para>In addition, the public <filename>site1</filename> and <filename>site2.example.com</filename> zones
|
||
should have special MX records that contain wildcard (`*') records
|
||
pointing to the bastion hosts. This is needed because external mail
|
||
servers do not have any other way of looking up how to deliver mail
|
||
to those internal hosts. With the wildcard records, the mail will
|
||
be delivered to the bastion host, which can then forward it on to
|
||
internal hosts.</para>
|
||
<para>Here's an example of a wildcard MX record:</para>
|
||
<programlisting><literal>* IN MX 10 external1.example.com.</literal></programlisting>
|
||
<para>Now that they accept mail on behalf of anything in the internal
|
||
network, the bastion hosts will need to know how to deliver mail
|
||
to internal hosts. In order for this to work properly, the resolvers on
|
||
the bastion hosts will need to be configured to point to the internal
|
||
name servers for DNS resolution.</para>
|
||
<para>Queries for internal hostnames will be answered by the internal
|
||
servers, and queries for external hostnames will be forwarded back
|
||
out to the DNS servers on the bastion hosts.</para>
|
||
<para>In order for all this to work properly, internal clients will
|
||
need to be configured to query <emphasis>only</emphasis> the internal
|
||
name servers for DNS queries. This could also be enforced via selective
|
||
filtering on the network.</para>
|
||
<para>If everything has been set properly, <emphasis>Example, Inc.</emphasis>'s
|
||
internal clients will now be able to:</para>
|
||
<itemizedlist><listitem>
|
||
<simpara>Look up any hostnames in the <literal>site1</literal> and
|
||
<literal>site2.example.com</literal> zones.</simpara></listitem>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<simpara>Look up any hostnames in the <literal>site1.internal</literal> and
|
||
<literal>site2.internal</literal> domains.</simpara></listitem>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<simpara>Look up any hostnames on the Internet.</simpara></listitem>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<simpara>Exchange mail with internal AND external people.</simpara></listitem></itemizedlist>
|
||
<para>Hosts on the Internet will be able to:</para>
|
||
<itemizedlist><listitem>
|
||
<simpara>Look up any hostnames in the <literal>site1</literal> and
|
||
<literal>site2.example.com</literal> zones.</simpara></listitem>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<simpara>Exchange mail with anyone in the <literal>site1</literal> and
|
||
<literal>site2.example.com</literal> zones.</simpara></listitem></itemizedlist>
|
||
|
||
<para>Here is an example configuration for the setup we just
|
||
described above. Note that this is only configuration information;
|
||
for information on how to configure your zone files, see <xref
|
||
linkend="sample_configuration"/></para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Internal DNS server config:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
|
||
acl internals { 172.16.72.0/24; 192.168.1.0/24; };
|
||
|
||
acl externals { <varname>bastion-ips-go-here</varname>; };
|
||
|
||
options {
|
||
...
|
||
...
|
||
forward only;
|
||
forwarders { // forward to external servers
|
||
<varname>bastion-ips-go-here</varname>;
|
||
};
|
||
allow-transfer { none; }; // sample allow-transfer (no one)
|
||
allow-query { internals; externals; }; // restrict query access
|
||
allow-recursion { internals; }; // restrict recursion
|
||
...
|
||
...
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
zone "site1.example.com" { // sample master zone
|
||
type master;
|
||
file "m/site1.example.com";
|
||
forwarders { }; // do normal iterative
|
||
// resolution (do not forward)
|
||
allow-query { internals; externals; };
|
||
allow-transfer { internals; };
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
zone "site2.example.com" { // sample slave zone
|
||
type slave;
|
||
file "s/site2.example.com";
|
||
masters { 172.16.72.3; };
|
||
forwarders { };
|
||
allow-query { internals; externals; };
|
||
allow-transfer { internals; };
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
zone "site1.internal" {
|
||
type master;
|
||
file "m/site1.internal";
|
||
forwarders { };
|
||
allow-query { internals; };
|
||
allow-transfer { internals; }
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
zone "site2.internal" {
|
||
type slave;
|
||
file "s/site2.internal";
|
||
masters { 172.16.72.3; };
|
||
forwarders { };
|
||
allow-query { internals };
|
||
allow-transfer { internals; }
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>External (bastion host) DNS server config:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
acl internals { 172.16.72.0/24; 192.168.1.0/24; };
|
||
|
||
acl externals { bastion-ips-go-here; };
|
||
|
||
options {
|
||
...
|
||
...
|
||
allow-transfer { none; }; // sample allow-transfer (no one)
|
||
allow-query { internals; externals; }; // restrict query access
|
||
allow-recursion { internals; externals; }; // restrict recursion
|
||
...
|
||
...
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
zone "site1.example.com" { // sample slave zone
|
||
type master;
|
||
file "m/site1.foo.com";
|
||
allow-query { any; };
|
||
allow-transfer { internals; externals; };
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
zone "site2.example.com" {
|
||
type slave;
|
||
file "s/site2.foo.com";
|
||
masters { another_bastion_host_maybe; };
|
||
allow-query { any; };
|
||
allow-transfer { internals; externals; }
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>In the <filename>resolv.conf</filename> (or equivalent) on
|
||
the bastion host(s):</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
search ...
|
||
nameserver 172.16.72.2
|
||
nameserver 172.16.72.3
|
||
nameserver 172.16.72.4
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1 id="tsig"><title>TSIG</title>
|
||
<para>This is a short guide to setting up Transaction SIGnatures
|
||
(TSIG) based transaction security in <acronym>BIND</acronym>. It describes changes
|
||
to the configuration file as well as what changes are required for
|
||
different features, including the process of creating transaction
|
||
keys and using transaction signatures with <acronym>BIND</acronym>.</para>
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> primarily supports TSIG for server to server communication.
|
||
This includes zone transfer, notify, and recursive query messages.
|
||
Resolvers based on newer versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 have limited support
|
||
for TSIG.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>TSIG might be most useful for dynamic update. A primary
|
||
server for a dynamic zone should use access control to control
|
||
updates, but IP-based access control is insufficient.
|
||
The cryptographic access control provided by TSIG
|
||
is far superior. The <command>nsupdate</command>
|
||
program supports TSIG via the <option>-k</option> and
|
||
<option>-y</option> command line options.</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title>Generate Shared Keys for Each Pair of Hosts</title>
|
||
<para>A shared secret is generated to be shared between <emphasis>host1</emphasis> and <emphasis>host2</emphasis>.
|
||
An arbitrary key name is chosen: "host1-host2.". The key name must
|
||
be the same on both hosts.</para>
|
||
<sect3><title>Automatic Generation</title>
|
||
<para>The following command will generate a 128 bit (16 byte) HMAC-MD5
|
||
key as described above. Longer keys are better, but shorter keys
|
||
are easier to read. Note that the maximum key length is 512 bits;
|
||
keys longer than that will be digested with MD5 to produce a 128
|
||
bit key.</para>
|
||
<para><userinput>dnssec-keygen -a hmac-md5 -b 128 -n HOST host1-host2.</userinput></para>
|
||
<para>The key is in the file <filename>Khost1-host2.+157+00000.private</filename>.
|
||
Nothing directly uses this file, but the base-64 encoded string
|
||
following "<literal>Key:</literal>"
|
||
can be extracted from the file and used as a shared secret:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>Key: La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==</programlisting>
|
||
<para>The string "<literal>La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==</literal>" can
|
||
be used as the shared secret.</para></sect3>
|
||
<sect3><title>Manual Generation</title>
|
||
<para>The shared secret is simply a random sequence of bits, encoded
|
||
in base-64. Most ASCII strings are valid base-64 strings (assuming
|
||
the length is a multiple of 4 and only valid characters are used),
|
||
so the shared secret can be manually generated.</para>
|
||
<para>Also, a known string can be run through <command>mmencode</command> or
|
||
a similar program to generate base-64 encoded data.</para></sect3></sect2>
|
||
<sect2><title>Copying the Shared Secret to Both Machines</title>
|
||
<para>This is beyond the scope of DNS. A secure transport mechanism
|
||
should be used. This could be secure FTP, ssh, telephone, etc.</para></sect2>
|
||
<sect2><title>Informing the Servers of the Key's Existence</title>
|
||
<para>Imagine <emphasis>host1</emphasis> and <emphasis>host 2</emphasis> are
|
||
both servers. The following is added to each server's <filename>named.conf</filename> file:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
key host1-host2. {
|
||
algorithm hmac-md5;
|
||
secret "La/E5CjG9O+os1jq0a2jdA==";
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>The algorithm, hmac-md5, is the only one supported by <acronym>BIND</acronym>.
|
||
The secret is the one generated above. Since this is a secret, it
|
||
is recommended that either <filename>named.conf</filename> be non-world
|
||
readable, or the key directive be added to a non-world readable
|
||
file that is included by <filename>named.conf</filename>.</para>
|
||
<para>At this point, the key is recognized. This means that if the
|
||
server receives a message signed by this key, it can verify the
|
||
signature. If the signature is successfully verified, the
|
||
response is signed by the same key.</para></sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title>Instructing the Server to Use the Key</title>
|
||
<para>Since keys are shared between two hosts only, the server must
|
||
be told when keys are to be used. The following is added to the <filename>named.conf</filename> file
|
||
for <emphasis>host1</emphasis>, if the IP address of <emphasis>host2</emphasis> is
|
||
10.1.2.3:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
server 10.1.2.3 {
|
||
keys { host1-host2. ;};
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>Multiple keys may be present, but only the first is used.
|
||
This directive does not contain any secrets, so it may be in a world-readable
|
||
file.</para>
|
||
<para>If <emphasis>host1</emphasis> sends a message that is a request
|
||
to that address, the message will be signed with the specified key. <emphasis>host1</emphasis> will
|
||
expect any responses to signed messages to be signed with the same
|
||
key.</para>
|
||
<para>A similar statement must be present in <emphasis>host2</emphasis>'s
|
||
configuration file (with <emphasis>host1</emphasis>'s address) for <emphasis>host2</emphasis> to
|
||
sign request messages to <emphasis>host1</emphasis>.</para></sect2>
|
||
<sect2><title>TSIG Key Based Access Control</title>
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> allows IP addresses and ranges to be specified in ACL
|
||
definitions and
|
||
<command>allow-{ query | transfer | update }</command> directives.
|
||
This has been extended to allow TSIG keys also. The above key would
|
||
be denoted <command>key host1-host2.</command></para>
|
||
<para>An example of an allow-update directive would be:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
allow-update { key host1-host2. ;};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
<para>This allows dynamic updates to succeed only if the request
|
||
was signed by a key named
|
||
"<command>host1-host2.</command>".</para> <para>You may want to read about the more
|
||
powerful <command>update-policy</command> statement in <xref
|
||
linkend="dynamic_update_policies"/>.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>Errors</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The processing of TSIG signed messages can result in
|
||
several errors. If a signed message is sent to a non-TSIG aware
|
||
server, a FORMERR will be returned, since the server will not
|
||
understand the record. This is a result of misconfiguration,
|
||
since the server must be explicitly configured to send a TSIG
|
||
signed message to a specific server.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>If a TSIG aware server receives a message signed by an
|
||
unknown key, the response will be unsigned with the TSIG
|
||
extended error code set to BADKEY. If a TSIG aware server
|
||
receives a message with a signature that does not validate, the
|
||
response will be unsigned with the TSIG extended error code set
|
||
to BADSIG. If a TSIG aware server receives a message with a time
|
||
outside of the allowed range, the response will be signed with
|
||
the TSIG extended error code set to BADTIME, and the time values
|
||
will be adjusted so that the response can be successfully
|
||
verified. In any of these cases, the message's rcode is set to
|
||
NOTAUTH.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>TKEY</title>
|
||
|
||
<para><command>TKEY</command> is a mechanism for automatically
|
||
generating a shared secret between two hosts. There are several
|
||
"modes" of <command>TKEY</command> that specify how the key is
|
||
generated or assigned. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9
|
||
implements only one of these modes,
|
||
the Diffie-Hellman key exchange. Both hosts are required to have
|
||
a Diffie-Hellman KEY record (although this record is not required
|
||
to be present in a zone). The <command>TKEY</command> process
|
||
must use signed messages, signed either by TSIG or SIG(0). The
|
||
result of <command>TKEY</command> is a shared secret that can be
|
||
used to sign messages with TSIG. <command>TKEY</command> can also
|
||
be used to delete shared secrets that it had previously
|
||
generated.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>TKEY</command> process is initiated by a client
|
||
or server by sending a signed <command>TKEY</command> query
|
||
(including any appropriate KEYs) to a TKEY-aware server. The
|
||
server response, if it indicates success, will contain a
|
||
<command>TKEY</command> record and any appropriate keys. After
|
||
this exchange, both participants have enough information to
|
||
determine the shared secret; the exact process depends on the
|
||
<command>TKEY</command> mode. When using the Diffie-Hellman
|
||
<command>TKEY</command> mode, Diffie-Hellman keys are exchanged,
|
||
and the shared secret is derived by both participants.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>SIG(0)</title>
|
||
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 partially supports DNSSEC SIG(0)
|
||
transaction signatures as specified in RFC 2535 and RFC2931. SIG(0)
|
||
uses public/private keys to authenticate messages. Access control
|
||
is performed in the same manner as TSIG keys; privileges can be
|
||
granted or denied based on the key name.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>When a SIG(0) signed message is received, it will only be
|
||
verified if the key is known and trusted by the server; the server
|
||
will not attempt to locate and/or validate the key.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>SIG(0) signing of multiple-message TCP streams is not
|
||
supported.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The only tool shipped with <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 that
|
||
generates SIG(0) signed messages is <command>nsupdate</command>.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1 id="DNSSEC">
|
||
<title>DNSSEC</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Cryptographic authentication of DNS information is possible
|
||
through the DNS Security (<emphasis>DNSSEC-bis</emphasis>) extensions,
|
||
defined in RFC <TBA>. This section describes the creation and use
|
||
of DNSSEC signed zones.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>In order to set up a DNSSEC secure zone, there are a series
|
||
of steps which must be followed. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 ships
|
||
with several tools
|
||
that are used in this process, which are explained in more detail
|
||
below. In all cases, the <option>-h</option> option prints a
|
||
full list of parameters. Note that the DNSSEC tools require the
|
||
keyset files to be in the working directory or the
|
||
directory specified by the <option>-h</option> option, and
|
||
that the tools shipped with BIND 9.2.x and earlier are not compatible
|
||
with the current ones.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>There must also be communication with the administrators of
|
||
the parent and/or child zone to transmit keys. A zone's security
|
||
status must be indicated by the parent zone for a DNSSEC capable
|
||
resolver to trust its data. This is done through the presense
|
||
or absence of a <literal>DS</literal> record at the delegation
|
||
point.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For other servers to trust data in this zone, they must
|
||
either be statically configured with this zone's zone key or the
|
||
zone key of another zone above this one in the DNS tree.</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>Generating Keys</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>dnssec-keygen</command> program is used to
|
||
generate keys.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>A secure zone must contain one or more zone keys. The
|
||
zone keys will sign all other records in the zone, as well as
|
||
the zone keys of any secure delegated zones. Zone keys must
|
||
have the same name as the zone, a name type of
|
||
<command>ZONE</command>, and must be usable for authentication.
|
||
It is recommended that zone keys use a cryptographic algorithm
|
||
designated as "mandatory to implement" by the IETF; currently
|
||
the only one is RSASHA1.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The following command will generate a 768 bit RSASHA1 key for
|
||
the <filename>child.example</filename> zone:</para>
|
||
|
||
<para><userinput>dnssec-keygen -a RSASHA1 -b 768 -n ZONE child.example.</userinput></para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Two output files will be produced:
|
||
<filename>Kchild.example.+005+12345.key</filename> and
|
||
<filename>Kchild.example.+005+12345.private</filename> (where
|
||
12345 is an example of a key tag). The key file names contain
|
||
the key name (<filename>child.example.</filename>), algorithm (3
|
||
is DSA, 1 is RSAMD5, 5 is RSASHA1, etc.), and the key tag (12345 in this case).
|
||
The private key (in the <filename>.private</filename> file) is
|
||
used to generate signatures, and the public key (in the
|
||
<filename>.key</filename> file) is used for signature
|
||
verification.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>To generate another key with the same properties (but with
|
||
a different key tag), repeat the above command.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The public keys should be inserted into the zone file by
|
||
including the <filename>.key</filename> files using
|
||
<command>$INCLUDE</command> statements.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>Signing the Zone</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>dnssec-signzone</command> program is used to
|
||
sign a zone.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Any <filename>keyset</filename> files corresponding
|
||
to secure subzones should be present. The zone signer will
|
||
generate <literal>NSEC</literal> and <literal>RRSIG</literal>
|
||
records for the zone, as well as <literal>DS</literal> for
|
||
the child zones if <literal>'-d'</literal> is specified.
|
||
If <literal>'-d'</literal> is not specified then DS RRsets for
|
||
the secure child zones need to be added manually.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The following command signs the zone, assuming it is in a
|
||
file called <filename>zone.child.example</filename>. By
|
||
default, all zone keys which have an available private key are
|
||
used to generate signatures.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para><userinput>dnssec-signzone -o child.example zone.child.example</userinput></para>
|
||
|
||
<para>One output file is produced:
|
||
<filename>zone.child.example.signed</filename>. This file
|
||
should be referenced by <filename>named.conf</filename> as the
|
||
input file for the zone.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para><command>dnssec-signzone</command> will also produce a
|
||
keyset and dsset files and optionally a dlvset file. These
|
||
are used to provide the parent zone administators with the
|
||
<literal>DNSKEYs</literal> (or their corresponding <literal>DS</literal>
|
||
records) that are the secure entry point to the zone.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title>Configuring Servers</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Unlike <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8,
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 does not verify signatures on load,
|
||
so zone keys for authoritative zones do not need to be specified
|
||
in the configuration file.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The public key for any security root must be present in
|
||
the configuration file's <command>trusted-keys</command>
|
||
statement, as described later in this document. </para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>IPv6 Support in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9</title>
|
||
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 fully supports all currently defined forms of IPv6
|
||
name to address and address to name lookups. It will also use
|
||
IPv6 addresses to make queries when running on an IPv6 capable
|
||
system.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For forward lookups, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 supports only AAAA
|
||
records. The use of A6 records is deprecated by RFC 3363, and the
|
||
support for forward lookups in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 is
|
||
removed accordingly.
|
||
However, authoritative <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 name servers still
|
||
load zone files containing A6 records correctly, answer queries
|
||
for A6 records, and accept zone transfer for a zone containing A6
|
||
records.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For IPv6 reverse lookups, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 supports
|
||
the traditional "nibble" format used in the
|
||
<emphasis>ip6.arpa</emphasis> domain, as well as the older, deprecated
|
||
<emphasis>ip6.int</emphasis> domain.
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 formerly
|
||
supported the "binary label" (also known as "bitstring") format.
|
||
The support of binary labels, however, is now completely removed
|
||
according to the changes in RFC 3363.
|
||
Any applications in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 do not understand
|
||
the format any more, and will return an error if given.
|
||
In particular, an authoritative <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 name
|
||
server rejects to load a zone file containing binary labels.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For an overview of the format and structure of IPv6 addresses,
|
||
see <xref linkend="ipv6addresses"/>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>Address Lookups Using AAAA Records</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The AAAA record is a parallel to the IPv4 A record. It
|
||
specifies the entire address in a single record. For
|
||
example,</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
$ORIGIN example.com.
|
||
host 3600 IN AAAA 2001:db8::1
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
<para>It is recommended that IPv4-in-IPv6 mapped addresses not
|
||
be used. If a host has an IPv4 address, use an A record, not
|
||
a AAAA, with <literal>::ffff:192.168.42.1</literal> as the
|
||
address.</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>Address to Name Lookups Using Nibble Format</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>When looking up an address in nibble format, the address
|
||
components are simply reversed, just as in IPv4, and
|
||
<literal>ip6.arpa.</literal> is appended to the resulting name.
|
||
For example, the following would provide reverse name lookup for
|
||
a host with address
|
||
<literal>2001:db8::1</literal>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
$ORIGIN 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.8.b.d.0.1.0.0.2.ip6.arpa.
|
||
1.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0 14400 IN PTR host.example.com.
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
</chapter>
|
||
|
||
<chapter id="ch05"><title>The <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 Lightweight Resolver</title>
|
||
<sect1><title>The Lightweight Resolver Library</title>
|
||
<para>Traditionally applications have been linked with a stub resolver
|
||
library that sends recursive DNS queries to a local caching name
|
||
server.</para>
|
||
<para>IPv6 once introduced new complexity into the resolution process,
|
||
such as following A6 chains and DNAME records, and simultaneous
|
||
lookup of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Though most of the complexity was
|
||
then removed, these are hard or impossible
|
||
to implement in a traditional stub resolver.</para>
|
||
<para>Instead, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 provides resolution services to local clients
|
||
using a combination of a lightweight resolver library and a resolver
|
||
daemon process running on the local host. These communicate using
|
||
a simple UDP-based protocol, the "lightweight resolver protocol"
|
||
that is distinct from and simpler than the full DNS protocol.</para></sect1>
|
||
<sect1 id="lwresd"><title>Running a Resolver Daemon</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>To use the lightweight resolver interface, the system must
|
||
run the resolver daemon <command>lwresd</command> or a local
|
||
name server configured with a <command>lwres</command> statement.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>By default, applications using the lightweight resolver library will make
|
||
UDP requests to the IPv4 loopback address (127.0.0.1) on port 921. The
|
||
address can be overridden by <command>lwserver</command> lines in
|
||
<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The daemon currently only looks in the DNS, but in the future
|
||
it may use other sources such as <filename>/etc/hosts</filename>,
|
||
NIS, etc.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>lwresd</command> daemon is essentially a
|
||
caching-only name server that responds to requests using the lightweight
|
||
resolver protocol rather than the DNS protocol. Because it needs
|
||
to run on each host, it is designed to require no or minimal configuration.
|
||
Unless configured otherwise, it uses the name servers listed on
|
||
<command>nameserver</command> lines in <filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>
|
||
as forwarders, but is also capable of doing the resolution autonomously if
|
||
none are specified.</para>
|
||
<para>The <command>lwresd</command> daemon may also be configured with a
|
||
<filename>named.conf</filename> style configuration file, in
|
||
<filename>/etc/lwresd.conf</filename> by default. A name server may also
|
||
be configured to act as a lightweight resolver daemon using the
|
||
<command>lwres</command> statement in <filename>named.conf</filename>.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1></chapter>
|
||
|
||
<chapter id="ch06"><title><acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 Configuration Reference</title>
|
||
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 configuration is broadly similar
|
||
to <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8; however, there are a few new areas
|
||
of configuration, such as views. <acronym>BIND</acronym>
|
||
8 configuration files should work with few alterations in <acronym>BIND</acronym>
|
||
9, although more complex configurations should be reviewed to check
|
||
if they can be more efficiently implemented using the new features
|
||
found in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> 4 configuration files can be converted to the new format
|
||
using the shell script
|
||
<filename>contrib/named-bootconf/named-bootconf.sh</filename>.</para>
|
||
<sect1 id="configuration_file_elements"><title>Configuration File Elements</title>
|
||
<para>Following is a list of elements used throughout the <acronym>BIND</acronym> configuration
|
||
file documentation:</para>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "2"
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "2Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.855in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.770in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>acl_name</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The name of an <varname>address_match_list</varname> as
|
||
defined by the <command>acl</command> statement.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>address_match_list</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A list of one or more <varname>ip_addr</varname>,
|
||
<varname>ip_prefix</varname>, <varname>key_id</varname>,
|
||
or <varname>acl_name</varname> elements, see
|
||
<xref linkend="address_match_lists"/>.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>domain_name</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A quoted string which will be used as
|
||
a DNS name, for example "<literal>my.test.domain</literal>".</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>dotted_decimal</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>One to four integers valued 0 through
|
||
255 separated by dots (`.'), such as <command>123</command>,
|
||
<command>45.67</command> or <command>89.123.45.67</command>.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>ip4_addr</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>An IPv4 address with exactly four elements
|
||
in <varname>dotted_decimal</varname> notation.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>ip6_addr</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>An IPv6 address, such as <command>2001:db8::1234</command>.
|
||
IPv6 scoped addresses that have ambiguity on their scope zones must be
|
||
disambiguated by an appropriate zone ID with the percent character
|
||
(`%') as delimiter.
|
||
It is strongly recommended to use string zone names rather than
|
||
numeric identifiers, in order to be robust against system
|
||
configuration changes.
|
||
However, since there is no standard mapping for such names and
|
||
identifier values, currently only interface names as link identifiers
|
||
are supported, assuming one-to-one mapping between interfaces and links.
|
||
For example, a link-local address <command>fe80::1</command> on the
|
||
link attached to the interface <command>ne0</command>
|
||
can be specified as <command>fe80::1%ne0</command>.
|
||
Note that on most systems link-local addresses always have the
|
||
ambiguity, and need to be disambiguated.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>ip_addr</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>An <varname>ip4_addr</varname> or <varname>ip6_addr</varname>.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>ip_port</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>An IP port <varname>number</varname>.
|
||
<varname>number</varname> is limited to 0 through 65535, with values
|
||
below 1024 typically restricted to use by processes running as root.
|
||
In some cases an asterisk (`*') character can be used as a placeholder to
|
||
select a random high-numbered port.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>ip_prefix</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>An IP network specified as an <varname>ip_addr</varname>,
|
||
followed by a slash (`/') and then the number of bits in the netmask.
|
||
Trailing zeros in a <varname>ip_addr</varname> may omitted.
|
||
For example, <command>127/8</command> is the network <command>127.0.0.0</command> with
|
||
netmask <command>255.0.0.0</command> and <command>1.2.3.0/28</command> is
|
||
network <command>1.2.3.0</command> with netmask <command>255.255.255.240</command>.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>key_id</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A <varname>domain_name</varname> representing
|
||
the name of a shared key, to be used for transaction security.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>key_list</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A list of one or more <varname>key_id</varname>s,
|
||
separated by semicolons and ending with a semicolon.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>number</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A non-negative 32 bit integer
|
||
(i.e., a number between 0 and 4294967295, inclusive).
|
||
Its acceptable value might further
|
||
be limited by the context in which it is used.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>path_name</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A quoted string which will be used as
|
||
a pathname, such as <filename>zones/master/my.test.domain</filename>.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>size_spec</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A number, the word <userinput>unlimited</userinput>,
|
||
or the word <userinput>default</userinput>.</para><para>
|
||
An <varname>unlimited</varname> <varname>size_spec</varname> requests unlimited
|
||
use, or the maximum available amount. A <varname>default size_spec</varname> uses
|
||
the limit that was in force when the server was started.</para><para>A <varname>number</varname> can
|
||
optionally be followed by a scaling factor: <userinput>K</userinput> or <userinput>k</userinput> for
|
||
kilobytes, <userinput>M</userinput> or <userinput>m</userinput> for
|
||
megabytes, and <userinput>G</userinput> or <userinput>g</userinput> for gigabytes,
|
||
which scale by 1024, 1024*1024, and 1024*1024*1024 respectively.</para>
|
||
<para>The value must be representable as a 64-bit unsigned integer
|
||
(0 to 18446744073709551615, inclusive).
|
||
Using <varname>unlimited</varname> is the best way
|
||
to safely set a really large number.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>yes_or_no</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Either <userinput>yes</userinput> or <userinput>no</userinput>.
|
||
The words <userinput>true</userinput> and <userinput>false</userinput> are
|
||
also accepted, as are the numbers <userinput>1</userinput> and <userinput>0</userinput>.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>dialup_option</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>One of <userinput>yes</userinput>,
|
||
<userinput>no</userinput>, <userinput>notify</userinput>,
|
||
<userinput>notify-passive</userinput>, <userinput>refresh</userinput> or
|
||
<userinput>passive</userinput>.
|
||
When used in a zone, <userinput>notify-passive</userinput>,
|
||
<userinput>refresh</userinput>, and <userinput>passive</userinput>
|
||
are restricted to slave and stub zones.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<sect2 id="address_match_lists"><title>Address Match Lists</title>
|
||
<sect3><title>Syntax</title>
|
||
<programlisting><varname>address_match_list</varname> = address_match_list_element ;
|
||
<optional> address_match_list_element; ... </optional>
|
||
<varname>address_match_list_element</varname> = <optional> ! </optional> (ip_address <optional>/length</optional> |
|
||
key key_id | acl_name | { address_match_list } )
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
<sect3><title>Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
<para>Address match lists are primarily used to determine access
|
||
control for various server operations. They are also used in
|
||
the <command>listen-on</command> and <command>sortlist</command>
|
||
statements. The elements
|
||
which constitute an address match list can be any of the following:</para>
|
||
<itemizedlist><listitem>
|
||
<simpara>an IP address (IPv4 or IPv6)</simpara></listitem>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<simpara>an IP prefix (in `/' notation)</simpara></listitem>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<simpara>a key ID, as defined by the <command>key</command> statement</simpara></listitem>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<simpara>the name of an address match list previously defined with
|
||
the <command>acl</command> statement</simpara></listitem>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<simpara>a nested address match list enclosed in braces</simpara></listitem></itemizedlist>
|
||
|
||
<para>Elements can be negated with a leading exclamation mark (`!'),
|
||
and the match list names "any", "none", "localhost", and "localnets"
|
||
are predefined. More information on those names can be found in
|
||
the description of the acl statement.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The addition of the key clause made the name of this syntactic
|
||
element something of a misnomer, since security keys can be used
|
||
to validate access without regard to a host or network address. Nonetheless,
|
||
the term "address match list" is still used throughout the documentation.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>When a given IP address or prefix is compared to an address
|
||
match list, the list is traversed in order until an element matches.
|
||
The interpretation of a match depends on whether the list is being used
|
||
for access control, defining listen-on ports, or in a sortlist,
|
||
and whether the element was negated.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>When used as an access control list, a non-negated match allows
|
||
access and a negated match denies access. If there is no match,
|
||
access is denied. The clauses <command>allow-notify</command>,
|
||
<command>allow-query</command>, <command>allow-transfer</command>,
|
||
<command>allow-update</command>, <command>allow-update-forwarding</command>,
|
||
and <command>blackhole</command> all
|
||
use address match lists this. Similarly, the listen-on option will cause
|
||
the server to not accept queries on any of the machine's addresses
|
||
which do not match the list.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Because of the first-match aspect of the algorithm, an element
|
||
that defines a subset of another element in the list should come
|
||
before the broader element, regardless of whether either is negated. For
|
||
example, in
|
||
<command>1.2.3/24; ! 1.2.3.13;</command> the 1.2.3.13 element is
|
||
completely useless because the algorithm will match any lookup for
|
||
1.2.3.13 to the 1.2.3/24 element.
|
||
Using <command>! 1.2.3.13; 1.2.3/24</command> fixes
|
||
that problem by having 1.2.3.13 blocked by the negation but all
|
||
other 1.2.3.* hosts fall through.</para>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>Comment Syntax</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 comment syntax allows for comments to appear
|
||
anywhere that white space may appear in a <acronym>BIND</acronym> configuration
|
||
file. To appeal to programmers of all kinds, they can be written
|
||
in the C, C++, or shell/perl style.</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect3>
|
||
<title>Syntax</title>
|
||
|
||
<para><programlisting>/* This is a <acronym>BIND</acronym> comment as in C */</programlisting>
|
||
<programlisting>// This is a <acronym>BIND</acronym> comment as in C++</programlisting>
|
||
<programlisting># This is a <acronym>BIND</acronym> comment as in common UNIX shells and perl</programlisting>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
<sect3>
|
||
<title>Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
<para>Comments may appear anywhere that whitespace may appear in
|
||
a <acronym>BIND</acronym> configuration file.</para>
|
||
<para>C-style comments start with the two characters /* (slash,
|
||
star) and end with */ (star, slash). Because they are completely
|
||
delimited with these characters, they can be used to comment only
|
||
a portion of a line or to span multiple lines.</para>
|
||
<para>C-style comments cannot be nested. For example, the following
|
||
is not valid because the entire comment ends with the first */:</para>
|
||
<para><programlisting>/* This is the start of a comment.
|
||
This is still part of the comment.
|
||
/* This is an incorrect attempt at nesting a comment. */
|
||
This is no longer in any comment. */
|
||
</programlisting></para>
|
||
|
||
<para>C++-style comments start with the two characters // (slash,
|
||
slash) and continue to the end of the physical line. They cannot
|
||
be continued across multiple physical lines; to have one logical
|
||
comment span multiple lines, each line must use the // pair.</para>
|
||
<para>For example:</para>
|
||
<para><programlisting>// This is the start of a comment. The next line
|
||
// is a new comment, even though it is logically
|
||
// part of the previous comment.
|
||
</programlisting></para>
|
||
<para>Shell-style (or perl-style, if you prefer) comments start
|
||
with the character <literal>#</literal> (number sign) and continue to the end of the
|
||
physical line, as in C++ comments.</para>
|
||
<para>For example:</para>
|
||
|
||
<para><programlisting># This is the start of a comment. The next line
|
||
# is a new comment, even though it is logically
|
||
# part of the previous comment.
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<warning>
|
||
<para>You cannot use the semicolon (`;') character
|
||
to start a comment such as you would in a zone file. The
|
||
semicolon indicates the end of a configuration
|
||
statement.</para>
|
||
</warning>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="Configuration_File_Grammar">
|
||
<title>Configuration File Grammar</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>A <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 configuration consists of statements and comments.
|
||
Statements end with a semicolon. Statements and comments are the
|
||
only elements that can appear without enclosing braces. Many
|
||
statements contain a block of sub-statements, which are also
|
||
terminated with a semicolon.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The following statements are supported:</para>
|
||
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0">
|
||
<tgroup cols = "2" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle =
|
||
"2Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.336in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.778in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>acl</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>defines a named IP address
|
||
matching list, for access control and other uses.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>controls</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>declares control channels to be used
|
||
by the <command>rndc</command> utility.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>include</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>includes a file.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>key</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>specifies key information for use in
|
||
authentication and authorization using TSIG.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>logging</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>specifies what the server logs, and where
|
||
the log messages are sent.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>lwres</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>configures <command>named</command> to
|
||
also act as a light weight resolver daemon (<command>lwresd</command>).</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>masters</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>defines a named masters list for
|
||
inclusion in stub and slave zone masters clauses.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>options</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>controls global server configuration
|
||
options and sets defaults for other statements.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>server</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>sets certain configuration options on
|
||
a per-server basis.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>trusted-keys</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>defines trusted DNSSEC keys.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>view</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>defines a view.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>zone</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>defines a zone.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>logging</command> and
|
||
<command>options</command> statements may only occur once per
|
||
configuration.</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>acl</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting><command>acl</command> acl-name {
|
||
address_match_list
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2 id="acl">
|
||
<title><command>acl</command> Statement Definition and
|
||
Usage</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>acl</command> statement assigns a symbolic
|
||
name to an address match list. It gets its name from a primary
|
||
use of address match lists: Access Control Lists (ACLs).</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Note that an address match list's name must be defined
|
||
with <command>acl</command> before it can be used elsewhere; no
|
||
forward references are allowed.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The following ACLs are built-in:</para>
|
||
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "2"
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "3Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.130in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "4.000in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>any</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Matches all hosts.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>none</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Matches no hosts.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>localhost</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Matches the IPv4 and IPv6 addresses of all network
|
||
interfaces on the system.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>localnets</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Matches any host on an IPv4 or IPv6 network
|
||
for which the system has an interface.
|
||
Some systems do not provide a way to determine the prefix lengths of
|
||
local IPv6 addresses.
|
||
In such a case, <command>localnets</command> only matches the local
|
||
IPv6 addresses, just like <command>localhost</command>.
|
||
</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>controls</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
<programlisting><command>controls</command> {
|
||
inet ( ip_addr | * ) <optional> port ip_port </optional> allow { <replaceable> address_match_list </replaceable> }
|
||
keys { <replaceable> key_list </replaceable> };
|
||
<optional> inet ...; </optional>
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2 id="controls_statement_definition_and_usage">
|
||
<title><command>controls</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>controls</command> statement declares control
|
||
channels to be used by system administrators to control the
|
||
operation of the name server. These control channels are
|
||
used by the <command>rndc</command> utility to send commands to
|
||
and retrieve non-DNS results from a name server.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>An <command>inet</command> control channel is a TCP
|
||
socket listening at the specified
|
||
<command>ip_port</command> on the specified
|
||
<command>ip_addr</command>, which can be an IPv4 or IPv6
|
||
address. An <command>ip_addr</command>
|
||
of <literal>*</literal> is interpreted as the IPv4 wildcard
|
||
address; connections will be accepted on any of the system's
|
||
IPv4 addresses. To listen on the IPv6 wildcard address,
|
||
use an <command>ip_addr</command> of <literal>::</literal>.
|
||
If you will only use <command>rndc</command> on the local host,
|
||
using the loopback address (<literal>127.0.0.1</literal>
|
||
or <literal>::1</literal>) is recommended for maximum
|
||
security.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
If no port is specified, port 953
|
||
is used. "<literal>*</literal>" cannot be used for
|
||
<command>ip_port</command>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The ability to issue commands over the control channel is
|
||
restricted by the <command>allow</command> and
|
||
<command>keys</command> clauses. Connections to the control
|
||
channel are permitted based on the
|
||
<command>address_match_list</command>. This is for simple
|
||
IP address based filtering only; any <command>key_id</command>
|
||
elements of the <command>address_match_list</command> are
|
||
ignored.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The primary authorization mechanism of the command
|
||
channel is the <command>key_list</command>, which contains
|
||
a list of <command>key_id</command>s.
|
||
Each <command>key_id</command> in
|
||
the <command>key_list</command> is authorized to execute
|
||
commands over the control channel.
|
||
See <xref linkend="rndc"/> in
|
||
<xref linkend="admin_tools"/>) for information about
|
||
configuring keys in <command>rndc</command>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
If no <command>controls</command> statement is present,
|
||
<command>named</command> will set up a default
|
||
control channel listening on the loopback address 127.0.0.1
|
||
and its IPv6 counterpart ::1.
|
||
In this case, and also when the <command>controls</command> statement
|
||
is present but does not have a <command>keys</command> clause,
|
||
<command>named</command> will attempt to load the command channel key
|
||
from the file <filename>rndc.key</filename> in
|
||
<filename>/etc</filename> (or whatever <varname>sysconfdir</varname>
|
||
was specified as when <acronym>BIND</acronym> was built).
|
||
To create a <filename>rndc.key</filename> file, run
|
||
<userinput>rndc-confgen -a</userinput>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <filename>rndc.key</filename> feature was created to
|
||
ease the transition of systems from <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8,
|
||
which did not have digital signatures on its command channel messages
|
||
and thus did not have a <command>keys</command> clause.
|
||
|
||
It makes it possible to use an existing <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8
|
||
configuration file in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 unchanged,
|
||
and still have <command>rndc</command> work the same way
|
||
<command>ndc</command> worked in BIND 8, simply by executing the
|
||
command <userinput>rndc-confgen -a</userinput> after BIND 9 is
|
||
installed.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Since the <filename>rndc.key</filename> feature
|
||
is only intended to allow the backward-compatible usage of
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 configuration files, this feature does not
|
||
have a high degree of configurability. You cannot easily change
|
||
the key name or the size of the secret, so you should make a
|
||
<filename>rndc.conf</filename> with your own key if you wish to change
|
||
those things. The <filename>rndc.key</filename> file also has its
|
||
permissions set such that only the owner of the file (the user that
|
||
<command>named</command> is running as) can access it. If you
|
||
desire greater flexibility in allowing other users to access
|
||
<command>rndc</command> commands then you need to create an
|
||
<filename>rndc.conf</filename> and make it group readable by a group
|
||
that contains the users who should have access.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The UNIX control channel type of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 is not supported
|
||
in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, and is not expected to be added in future
|
||
releases. If it is present in the controls statement from a
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 configuration file, it is ignored
|
||
and a warning is logged.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
To disable the command channel, use an empty <command>controls</command>
|
||
statement: <command>controls {<7B>};</command>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>include</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
<programlisting>include <replaceable>filename</replaceable>;</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>include</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>include</command> statement inserts the
|
||
specified file at the point where the <command>include</command>
|
||
statement is encountered. The <command>include</command>
|
||
statement facilitates the administration of configuration files
|
||
by permitting the reading or writing of some things but not
|
||
others. For example, the statement could include private keys
|
||
that are readable only by the name server.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>key</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
<programlisting>key <replaceable>key_id</replaceable> {
|
||
algorithm <replaceable>string</replaceable>;
|
||
secret <replaceable>string</replaceable>;
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>key</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>key</command> statement defines a shared
|
||
secret key for use with TSIG (see <xref linkend="tsig"/>)
|
||
or the command channel
|
||
(see <xref linkend="controls_statement_definition_and_usage"/>).
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The <command>key</command> statement can occur at the top level
|
||
of the configuration file or inside a <command>view</command>
|
||
statement. Keys defined in top-level <command>key</command>
|
||
statements can be used in all views. Keys intended for use in
|
||
a <command>controls</command> statement
|
||
(see <xref linkend="controls_statement_definition_and_usage"/>)
|
||
must be defined at the top level.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <replaceable>key_id</replaceable>, also known as the
|
||
key name, is a domain name uniquely identifying the key. It can
|
||
be used in a <command>server</command>
|
||
statement to cause requests sent to that
|
||
server to be signed with this key, or in address match lists to
|
||
verify that incoming requests have been signed with a key
|
||
matching this name, algorithm, and secret.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <replaceable>algorithm_id</replaceable> is a string
|
||
that specifies a security/authentication algorithm. The only
|
||
algorithm currently supported with TSIG authentication is
|
||
<literal>hmac-md5</literal>. The
|
||
<replaceable>secret_string</replaceable> is the secret to be
|
||
used by the algorithm, and is treated as a base-64 encoded
|
||
string.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>logging</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
<programlisting><command>logging</command> {
|
||
[ <command>channel</command> <replaceable>channel_name</replaceable> {
|
||
( <command>file</command> <replaceable>path name</replaceable>
|
||
[ <command>versions</command> ( <replaceable>number</replaceable> | <literal>unlimited</literal> ) ]
|
||
[ <command>size</command> <replaceable>size spec</replaceable> ]
|
||
| <command>syslog</command> <replaceable>syslog_facility</replaceable>
|
||
| <command>stderr</command>
|
||
| <command>null</command> );
|
||
[ <command>severity</command> (<option>critical</option> | <option>error</option> | <option>warning</option> | <option>notice</option> |
|
||
<option>info</option> | <option>debug</option> [ <replaceable>level</replaceable> ] | <option>dynamic</option> ); ]
|
||
[ <command>print-category</command> <option>yes</option> or <option>no</option>; ]
|
||
[ <command>print-severity</command> <option>yes</option> or <option>no</option>; ]
|
||
[ <command>print-time</command> <option>yes</option> or <option>no</option>; ]
|
||
}; ]
|
||
[ <command>category</command> <replaceable>category_name</replaceable> {
|
||
<replaceable>channel_name</replaceable> ; [ <replaceable>channel_nam</replaceable>e ; ... ]
|
||
}; ]
|
||
...
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>logging</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>logging</command> statement configures a wide
|
||
variety of logging options for the name server. Its <command>channel</command> phrase
|
||
associates output methods, format options and severity levels with
|
||
a name that can then be used with the <command>category</command> phrase
|
||
to select how various classes of messages are logged.</para>
|
||
<para>Only one <command>logging</command> statement is used to define
|
||
as many channels and categories as are wanted. If there is no <command>logging</command> statement,
|
||
the logging configuration will be:</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>logging {
|
||
category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
|
||
category unmatched { null; };
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
<para>In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, the logging configuration is only established when
|
||
the entire configuration file has been parsed. In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8, it was
|
||
established as soon as the <command>logging</command> statement
|
||
was parsed. When the server is starting up, all logging messages
|
||
regarding syntax errors in the configuration file go to the default
|
||
channels, or to standard error if the "<option>-g</option>" option
|
||
was specified.</para>
|
||
|
||
<sect3>
|
||
<title>The <command>channel</command> Phrase</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>All log output goes to one or more <emphasis>channels</emphasis>;
|
||
you can make as many of them as you want.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Every channel definition must include a destination clause that
|
||
says whether messages selected for the channel go to a file, to a
|
||
particular syslog facility, to the standard error stream, or are
|
||
discarded. It can optionally also limit the message severity level
|
||
that will be accepted by the channel (the default is
|
||
<command>info</command>), and whether to include a
|
||
<command>named</command>-generated time stamp, the category name
|
||
and/or severity level (the default is not to include any).</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>null</command> destination clause
|
||
causes all messages sent to the channel to be discarded;
|
||
in that case, other options for the channel are meaningless.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>file</command> destination clause directs the channel
|
||
to a disk file. It can include limitations
|
||
both on how large the file is allowed to become, and how many versions
|
||
of the file will be saved each time the file is opened.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>If you use the <command>versions</command> log file option, then
|
||
<command>named</command> will retain that many backup versions of the file by
|
||
renaming them when opening. For example, if you choose to keep 3 old versions
|
||
of the file <filename>lamers.log</filename> then just before it is opened
|
||
<filename>lamers.log.1</filename> is renamed to
|
||
<filename>lamers.log.2</filename>, <filename>lamers.log.0</filename> is renamed
|
||
to <filename>lamers.log.1</filename>, and <filename>lamers.log</filename> is
|
||
renamed to <filename>lamers.log.0</filename>.
|
||
You can say <command>versions unlimited</command> to not limit
|
||
the number of versions.
|
||
If a <command>size</command> option is associated with the log file,
|
||
then renaming is only done when the file being opened exceeds the
|
||
indicated size. No backup versions are kept by default; any existing
|
||
log file is simply appended.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>size</command> option for files is used to limit log
|
||
growth. If the file ever exceeds the size, then <command>named</command> will
|
||
stop writing to the file unless it has a <command>versions</command> option
|
||
associated with it. If backup versions are kept, the files are rolled as
|
||
described above and a new one begun. If there is no
|
||
<command>versions</command> option, no more data will be written to the log
|
||
until some out-of-band mechanism removes or truncates the log to less than the
|
||
maximum size. The default behavior is not to limit the size of the
|
||
file.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Example usage of the <command>size</command> and
|
||
<command>versions</command> options:</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>channel an_example_channel {
|
||
file "example.log" versions 3 size 20m;
|
||
print-time yes;
|
||
print-category yes;
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>syslog</command> destination clause directs the
|
||
channel to the system log. Its argument is a
|
||
syslog facility as described in the <command>syslog</command> man
|
||
page. Known facilities are <command>kern</command>, <command>user</command>,
|
||
<command>mail</command>, <command>daemon</command>, <command>auth</command>,
|
||
<command>syslog</command>, <command>lpr</command>, <command>news</command>,
|
||
<command>uucp</command>, <command>cron</command>, <command>authpriv</command>,
|
||
<command>ftp</command>, <command>local0</command>, <command>local1</command>,
|
||
<command>local2</command>, <command>local3</command>, <command>local4</command>,
|
||
<command>local5</command>, <command>local6</command> and
|
||
<command>local7</command>, however not all facilities are supported on
|
||
all operating systems.
|
||
How <command>syslog</command> will handle messages sent to
|
||
this facility is described in the <command>syslog.conf</command> man
|
||
page. If you have a system which uses a very old version of <command>syslog</command> that
|
||
only uses two arguments to the <command>openlog()</command> function,
|
||
then this clause is silently ignored.</para>
|
||
<para>The <command>severity</command> clause works like <command>syslog</command>'s
|
||
"priorities", except that they can also be used if you are writing
|
||
straight to a file rather than using <command>syslog</command>.
|
||
Messages which are not at least of the severity level given will
|
||
not be selected for the channel; messages of higher severity levels
|
||
will be accepted.</para>
|
||
<para>If you are using <command>syslog</command>, then the <command>syslog.conf</command> priorities
|
||
will also determine what eventually passes through. For example,
|
||
defining a channel facility and severity as <command>daemon</command> and <command>debug</command> but
|
||
only logging <command>daemon.warning</command> via <command>syslog.conf</command> will
|
||
cause messages of severity <command>info</command> and <command>notice</command> to
|
||
be dropped. If the situation were reversed, with <command>named</command> writing
|
||
messages of only <command>warning</command> or higher, then <command>syslogd</command> would
|
||
print all messages it received from the channel.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>stderr</command> destination clause directs the
|
||
channel to the server's standard error stream. This is intended for
|
||
use when the server is running as a foreground process, for example
|
||
when debugging a configuration.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The server can supply extensive debugging information when
|
||
it is in debugging mode. If the server's global debug level is greater
|
||
than zero, then debugging mode will be active. The global debug
|
||
level is set either by starting the <command>named</command> server
|
||
with the <option>-d</option> flag followed by a positive integer,
|
||
or by running <command>rndc trace</command>.
|
||
The global debug level
|
||
can be set to zero, and debugging mode turned off, by running <command>ndc
|
||
notrace</command>. All debugging messages in the server have a debug
|
||
level, and higher debug levels give more detailed output. Channels
|
||
that specify a specific debug severity, for example:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>channel specific_debug_level {
|
||
file "foo";
|
||
severity debug 3;
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>will get debugging output of level 3 or less any time the
|
||
server is in debugging mode, regardless of the global debugging
|
||
level. Channels with <command>dynamic</command> severity use the
|
||
server's global debug level to determine what messages to print.</para>
|
||
<para>If <command>print-time</command> has been turned on, then
|
||
the date and time will be logged. <command>print-time</command> may
|
||
be specified for a <command>syslog</command> channel, but is usually
|
||
pointless since <command>syslog</command> also prints the date and
|
||
time. If <command>print-category</command> is requested, then the
|
||
category of the message will be logged as well. Finally, if <command>print-severity</command> is
|
||
on, then the severity level of the message will be logged. The <command>print-</command> options may
|
||
be used in any combination, and will always be printed in the following
|
||
order: time, category, severity. Here is an example where all three <command>print-</command> options
|
||
are on:</para>
|
||
|
||
<para><computeroutput>28-Feb-2000 15:05:32.863 general: notice: running</computeroutput></para>
|
||
|
||
<para>There are four predefined channels that are used for
|
||
<command>named</command>'s default logging as follows. How they are
|
||
used is described in <xref linkend="the_category_phrase"/>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>channel default_syslog {
|
||
syslog daemon; // send to syslog's daemon
|
||
// facility
|
||
severity info; // only send priority info
|
||
// and higher
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
channel default_debug {
|
||
file "named.run"; // write to named.run in
|
||
// the working directory
|
||
// Note: stderr is used instead
|
||
// of "named.run"
|
||
// if the server is started
|
||
// with the '-f' option.
|
||
severity dynamic; // log at the server's
|
||
// current debug level
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
channel default_stderr {
|
||
stderr; // writes to stderr
|
||
severity info; // only send priority info
|
||
// and higher
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
channel null {
|
||
null; // toss anything sent to
|
||
// this channel
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>default_debug</command> channel has the special
|
||
property that it only produces output when the server's debug level is
|
||
nonzero. It normally writes to a file <filename>named.run</filename>
|
||
in the server's working directory.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For security reasons, when the "<option>-u</option>"
|
||
command line option is used, the <filename>named.run</filename> file
|
||
is created only after <command>named</command> has changed to the
|
||
new UID, and any debug output generated while <command>named</command> is
|
||
starting up and still running as root is discarded. If you need
|
||
to capture this output, you must run the server with the "<option>-g</option>"
|
||
option and redirect standard error to a file.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Once a channel is defined, it cannot be redefined. Thus you
|
||
cannot alter the built-in channels directly, but you can modify
|
||
the default logging by pointing categories at channels you have defined.</para>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="the_category_phrase"><title>The <command>category</command> Phrase</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>There are many categories, so you can send the logs you want
|
||
to see wherever you want, without seeing logs you don't want. If
|
||
you don't specify a list of channels for a category, then log messages
|
||
in that category will be sent to the <command>default</command> category
|
||
instead. If you don't specify a default category, the following
|
||
"default default" is used:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>As an example, let's say you want to log security events to
|
||
a file, but you also want keep the default logging behavior. You'd
|
||
specify the following:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>channel my_security_channel {
|
||
file "my_security_file";
|
||
severity info;
|
||
};
|
||
category security {
|
||
my_security_channel;
|
||
default_syslog;
|
||
default_debug;
|
||
};</programlisting>
|
||
<para>To discard all messages in a category, specify the <command>null</command> channel:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>category xfer-out { null; };
|
||
category notify { null; };
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>Following are the available categories and brief descriptions
|
||
of the types of log information they contain. More
|
||
categories may be added in future <acronym>BIND</acronym> releases.</para>
|
||
<informaltable
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "2"
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.150in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.350in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>default</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The default category defines the logging
|
||
options for those categories where no specific configuration has been
|
||
defined.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>general</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The catch-all. Many things still aren't
|
||
classified into categories, and they all end up here.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>database</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Messages relating to the databases used
|
||
internally by the name server to store zone and cache data.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>security</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Approval and denial of requests.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>config</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Configuration file parsing and processing.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>resolver</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>DNS resolution, such as the recursive
|
||
lookups performed on behalf of clients by a caching name server.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>xfer-in</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Zone transfers the server is receiving.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>xfer-out</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Zone transfers the server is sending.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>notify</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The NOTIFY protocol.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>client</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Processing of client requests.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>unmatched</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Messages that named was unable to determine the
|
||
class of or for which there was no matching <command>view</command>.
|
||
A one line summary is also logged to the <command>client</command> category.
|
||
This category is best sent to a file or stderr, by default it is sent to
|
||
the <command>null</command> channel.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>network</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Network operations.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>update</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Dynamic updates.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>update-security</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Approval and denial of update requests.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>queries</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Specify where queries should be logged to.</para>
|
||
<para>
|
||
At startup, specifing the category <command>queries</command> will also
|
||
enable query logging unless <command>querylog</command> option has been
|
||
specified.
|
||
</para>
|
||
<para>
|
||
The query log entry reports the client's IP address and port number. The
|
||
query name, class and type. It also reports whether the Recursion Desired
|
||
flag was set (+ if set, - if not set), EDNS was in use (E) or if the
|
||
query was signed (S).</para>
|
||
<programlisting><computeroutput>client 127.0.0.1#62536: query: www.example.com IN AAAA +SE</computeroutput>
|
||
<computeroutput>client ::1#62537: query: www.example.net IN AAAA -SE</computeroutput>
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>dispatch</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Dispatching of incoming packets to the
|
||
server modules where they are to be processed.
|
||
</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>dnssec</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>DNSSEC and TSIG protocol processing.
|
||
</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>lame-servers</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Lame servers. These are misconfigurations
|
||
in remote servers, discovered by BIND 9 when trying to query
|
||
those servers during resolution.
|
||
</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>delegation-only</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Delegation only. Logs queries that have have
|
||
been forced to NXDOMAIN as the result of a delegation-only zone or
|
||
a <command>delegation-only</command> in a hint or stub zone declaration.
|
||
</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>lwres</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
|
||
<para> This is the grammar of the <command>lwres</command>
|
||
statement in the <filename>named.conf</filename> file:</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting><command>lwres</command> {
|
||
<optional> listen-on { <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> view <replaceable>view_name</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> search { <replaceable>domain_name</replaceable> ; <optional> <replaceable>domain_name</replaceable> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> ndots <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>lwres</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>lwres</command> statement configures the name
|
||
server to also act as a lightweight resolver server, see
|
||
<xref linkend="lwresd"/>. There may be be multiple
|
||
<command>lwres</command> statements configuring
|
||
lightweight resolver servers with different properties.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>listen-on</command> statement specifies a list of
|
||
addresses (and ports) that this instance of a lightweight resolver daemon
|
||
should accept requests on. If no port is specified, port 921 is used.
|
||
If this statement is omitted, requests will be accepted on 127.0.0.1,
|
||
port 921.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>view</command> statement binds this instance of a
|
||
lightweight resolver daemon to a view in the DNS namespace, so that the
|
||
response will be constructed in the same manner as a normal DNS query
|
||
matching this view. If this statement is omitted, the default view is
|
||
used, and if there is no default view, an error is triggered.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>search</command> statement is equivalent to the
|
||
<command>search</command> statement in
|
||
<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>. It provides a list of domains
|
||
which are appended to relative names in queries.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>ndots</command> statement is equivalent to the
|
||
<command>ndots</command> statement in
|
||
<filename>/etc/resolv.conf</filename>. It indicates the minimum
|
||
number of dots in a relative domain name that should result in an
|
||
exact match lookup before search path elements are appended.</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>masters</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
<command>masters</command> <replaceable>name</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> { ( <replaceable>masters_list</replaceable> | <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> <optional>key <replaceable>key</replaceable></optional> ) ; <optional>...</optional> } ;
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>masters</command> Statement Definition and Usage </title>
|
||
<para><command>masters</command> lists allow for a common set of masters
|
||
to be easily used by multiple stub and slave zones.</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title><command>options</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>This is the grammar of the <command>options</command>
|
||
statement in the <filename>named.conf</filename> file:</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>options {
|
||
<optional> version <replaceable>version_string</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> hostname <replaceable>hostname_string</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> server-id <replaceable>server_id_string</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> directory <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> key-directory <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> named-xfer <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> tkey-domain <replaceable>domainname</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> tkey-dhkey <replaceable>key_name</replaceable> <replaceable>key_tag</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> dump-file <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> memstatistics-file <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> pid-file <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> statistics-file <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> zone-statistics <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> auth-nxdomain <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> deallocate-on-exit <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> dialup <replaceable>dialup_option</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> fake-iquery <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> fetch-glue <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> flush-zones-on-shutdown <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> has-old-clients <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> host-statistics <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> minimal-responses <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> multiple-cnames <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> notify <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> | <replaceable>explicit</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> recursion <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> rfc2308-type1 <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> use-id-pool <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> maintain-ixfr-base <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> dnssec-enable <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> dnssec-lookaside <replaceable>domain</replaceable> trust-anchor <replaceable>domain</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> dnssec-must-be-secure <replaceable>domain yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> forward ( <replaceable>only</replaceable> | <replaceable>first</replaceable> ); </optional>
|
||
<optional> forwarders { <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> dual-stack-servers <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> { ( <replaceable>domain_name</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> | <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ) ; ... }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> check-names ( <replaceable>master</replaceable> | <replaceable>slave</replaceable> | <replaceable> response</replaceable> )( <replaceable>warn</replaceable> | <replaceable>fail</replaceable> | <replaceable>ignore</replaceable> ); </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-notify { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-query { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-transfer { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-recursion { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-update-forwarding { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-v6-synthesis { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> blackhole { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> avoid-v4-udp-ports { <replaceable>port_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> avoid-v6-udp-ports { <replaceable>port_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> listen-on <optional> port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> </optional> { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> listen-on-v6 <optional> port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> </optional> { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> query-source <optional> address ( <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional> <optional> port ( <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> query-source-v6 <optional> address ( <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional> <optional> port ( <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable> | <replaceable>*</replaceable> ) </optional>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-transfer-time-in <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-transfer-time-out <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-transfer-idle-in <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-transfer-idle-out <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> tcp-clients <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> recursive-clients <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> serial-query-rate <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> serial-queries <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> tcp-listen-queue <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfer-format <replaceable>( one-answer | many-answers )</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfers-in <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfers-out <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfers-per-ns <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> alt-transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> use-alt-transfer-source <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> notify-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> notify-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> also-notify { <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-ixfr-log-size <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-journal-size <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> coresize <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> datasize <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> files <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> stacksize <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> cleaning-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> heartbeat-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> interface-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> statistics-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> topology { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }</optional>;
|
||
<optional> sortlist { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> }</optional>;
|
||
<optional> rrset-order { <replaceable>order_spec</replaceable> ; <optional> <replaceable>order_spec</replaceable> ; ... </optional> </optional> };
|
||
<optional> lame-ttl <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-ncache-ttl <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-cache-ttl <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> sig-validity-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> min-roots <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> use-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> provide-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> request-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> treat-cr-as-space <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> min-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> min-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> additional-from-auth <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> additional-from-cache <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> random-device <replaceable>path_name</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-cache-size <replaceable>size_spec</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> match-mapped-addresses <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> preferred-glue ( <replaceable>A</replaceable> | <replaceable>AAAA</replaceable> | <replaceable>NONE</replaceable> ); </optional>
|
||
<optional> edns-udp-size <replaceable>number</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> root-delegation-only <optional> exclude { <replaceable>namelist</replaceable> } </optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> querylog <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
};
|
||
<optional> disable-algorithms <replaceable>domain</replaceable> { <replaceable>algorithm</replaceable>; <optional> <replaceable>algorithm</replaceable>; </optional> }; </optional>
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2 id="options"><title><command>options</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>options</command> statement sets up global options
|
||
to be used by <acronym>BIND</acronym>. This statement may appear only
|
||
once in a configuration file. If there is no <command>options</command>
|
||
statement, an options block with each option set to its default will
|
||
be used.</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>directory</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The working directory of the server.
|
||
Any non-absolute pathnames in the configuration file will be taken
|
||
as relative to this directory. The default location for most server
|
||
output files (e.g. <filename>named.run</filename>) is this directory.
|
||
If a directory is not specified, the working directory defaults
|
||
to `<filename>.</filename>', the directory from which the server
|
||
was started. The directory specified should be an absolute path.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>key-directory</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>When performing dynamic update of secure zones, the
|
||
directory where the public and private key files should be found,
|
||
if different than the current working directory. The directory specified
|
||
must be an absolute path.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>named-xfer</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para><emphasis>This option is obsolete.</emphasis>
|
||
It was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to
|
||
specify the pathname to the <command>named-xfer</command> program.
|
||
In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, no separate <command>named-xfer</command> program is
|
||
needed; its functionality is built into the name server.</para>
|
||
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>tkey-domain</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The domain appended to the names of all
|
||
shared keys generated with <command>TKEY</command>. When a client
|
||
requests a <command>TKEY</command> exchange, it may or may not specify
|
||
the desired name for the key. If present, the name of the shared
|
||
key will be "<varname>client specified part</varname>" +
|
||
"<varname>tkey-domain</varname>".
|
||
Otherwise, the name of the shared key will be "<varname>random hex
|
||
digits</varname>" + "<varname>tkey-domain</varname>". In most cases,
|
||
the <command>domainname</command> should be the server's domain
|
||
name.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>tkey-dhkey</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The Diffie-Hellman key used by the server
|
||
to generate shared keys with clients using the Diffie-Hellman mode
|
||
of <command>TKEY</command>. The server must be able to load the
|
||
public and private keys from files in the working directory. In
|
||
most cases, the keyname should be the server's host name.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>dump-file</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The pathname of the file the server dumps
|
||
the database to when instructed to do so with
|
||
<command>rndc dumpdb</command>.
|
||
If not specified, the default is <filename>named_dump.db</filename>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>memstatistics-file</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The pathname of the file the server writes memory
|
||
usage statistics to on exit. If not specified,
|
||
the default is <filename>named.memstats</filename>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>pid-file</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The pathname of the file the server writes its process ID
|
||
in. If not specified, the default is <filename>/var/run/named.pid</filename>.
|
||
The pid-file is used by programs that want to send signals to the running
|
||
name server. Specifying <command>pid-file none</command> disables the
|
||
use of a PID file — no file will be written and any
|
||
existing one will be removed. Note that <command>none</command>
|
||
is a keyword, not a file name, and therefore is not enclosed in
|
||
double quotes.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>statistics-file</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The pathname of the file the server appends statistics
|
||
to when instructed to do so using <command>rndc stats</command>.
|
||
If not specified, the default is <filename>named.stats</filename> in the
|
||
server's current directory. The format of the file is described
|
||
in <xref linkend="statsfile"/></para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>port</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
The UDP/TCP port number the server uses for
|
||
receiving and sending DNS protocol traffic.
|
||
The default is 53. This option is mainly intended for server testing;
|
||
a server using a port other than 53 will not be able to communicate with
|
||
the global DNS.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>random-device</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
The source of entropy to be used by the server. Entropy is primarily needed
|
||
for DNSSEC operations, such as TKEY transactions and dynamic update of signed
|
||
zones. This options specifies the device (or file) from which to read
|
||
entropy. If this is a file, operations requiring entropy will fail when the
|
||
file has been exhausted. If not specified, the default value is
|
||
<filename>/dev/random</filename>
|
||
(or equivalent) when present, and none otherwise. The
|
||
<command>random-device</command> option takes effect during
|
||
the initial configuration load at server startup time and
|
||
is ignored on subsequent reloads.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>preferred-glue</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
If specified the listed type (A or AAAA) will be emitted before other glue
|
||
in the additional section of a query response.
|
||
The default is not to preference any type (NONE).
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>root-delegation-only</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
Turn on enforcement of delegation-only in TLDs and root zones with an optional
|
||
exclude list.
|
||
</para>
|
||
<para>
|
||
Note some TLDs are NOT delegation only (e.g. "DE", "LV", "US" and "MUSEUM").
|
||
</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
options {
|
||
root-delegation-only exclude { "de"; "lv"; "us"; "museum"; };
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>disable-algorithms</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
Disable the specified DNSSEC algorithms at and below the specified name.
|
||
Multiple <command>disable-algorithms</command> statements are allowed.
|
||
Only the most specific will be applied.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>dnssec-lookaside</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
When set <command>dnssec-lookaside</command> provides the
|
||
validator with an alternate method to validate DNSKEY records at the
|
||
top of a zone. When a DNSKEY is at or below a domain specified by the
|
||
deepest <command>dnssec-lookaside</command>, and the normal dnssec validation
|
||
has left the key untrusted, the trust-anchor will be append to the key
|
||
name and a DLV record will be looked up to see if it can validate the
|
||
key. If the DLV record validates a DNSKEY (similarly to the way a DS
|
||
record does) the DNSKEY RRset is deemed to be trusted.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>dnssec-must-be-secure</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
Specify heirachies which must / may not be secure (signed and validated).
|
||
If <userinput>yes</userinput> then named will only accept answers if they
|
||
are secure.
|
||
If <userinput>no</userinput> then normal dnssec validation applies
|
||
allowing for insecure answers to be accepted.
|
||
The specified domain must be under a <command>trusted-key</command> or
|
||
<command>dnssec-lookaside</command> must be active.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="boolean_options"><title>Boolean Options</title>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>auth-nxdomain</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>If <userinput>yes</userinput>, then the <command>AA</command> bit
|
||
is always set on NXDOMAIN responses, even if the server is not actually
|
||
authoritative. The default is <userinput>no</userinput>; this is
|
||
a change from <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8. If you are using very old DNS software, you
|
||
may need to set it to <userinput>yes</userinput>.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>deallocate-on-exit</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>This option was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to enable checking
|
||
for memory leaks on exit. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 ignores the option and always performs
|
||
the checks.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>dialup</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>If <userinput>yes</userinput>, then the
|
||
server treats all zones as if they are doing zone transfers across
|
||
a dial on demand dialup link, which can be brought up by traffic
|
||
originating from this server. This has different effects according
|
||
to zone type and concentrates the zone maintenance so that it all
|
||
happens in a short interval, once every <command>heartbeat-interval</command> and
|
||
hopefully during the one call. It also suppresses some of the normal
|
||
zone maintenance traffic. The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.</para>
|
||
<para>The <command>dialup</command> option
|
||
may also be specified in the <command>view</command> and
|
||
<command>zone</command> statements,
|
||
in which case it overrides the global <command>dialup</command>
|
||
option.</para>
|
||
<para>If the zone is a master zone then the server will send out a NOTIFY
|
||
request to all the slaves (default). This should trigger the zone serial
|
||
number check in the slave (providing it supports NOTIFY) allowing the slave
|
||
to verify the zone while the connection is active.
|
||
The set of servers to which NOTIFY is sent can be controlled by
|
||
<command>notify</command> and <command>also-notify</command>.</para>
|
||
<para>If the
|
||
zone is a slave or stub zone, then the server will suppress the regular
|
||
"zone up to date" (refresh) queries and only perform them when the
|
||
<command>heartbeat-interval</command> expires in addition to sending
|
||
NOTIFY requests.</para><para>Finer control can be achieved by using
|
||
<userinput>notify</userinput> which only sends NOTIFY messages,
|
||
<userinput>notify-passive</userinput> which sends NOTIFY messages and
|
||
suppresses the normal refresh queries, <userinput>refresh</userinput>
|
||
which suppresses normal refresh processing and sends refresh queries
|
||
when the <command>heartbeat-interval</command> expires, and
|
||
<userinput>passive</userinput> which just disables normal refresh
|
||
processing.</para>
|
||
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0">
|
||
<tgroup cols = "4" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.150in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.150in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "3" colnum = "3" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.150in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "4" colnum = "4" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.150in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>dialup mode</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>normal refresh</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>heart-beat refresh</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para>heart-beat notify</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>no</command> (default)</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>yes</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>yes</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>yes</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para>yes</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>notify</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>yes</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para>yes</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>refresh</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>yes</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>passive</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>notify-passive</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>no</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para>yes</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
|
||
<para>Note that normal NOTIFY processing is not affected by
|
||
<command>dialup</command>.</para>
|
||
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>fake-iquery</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8, this option
|
||
enabled simulating the obsolete DNS query type
|
||
IQUERY. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 never does IQUERY simulation.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>fetch-glue</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>This option is obsolete.
|
||
In BIND 8, <userinput>fetch-glue yes</userinput>
|
||
caused the server to attempt to fetch glue resource records it
|
||
didn't have when constructing the additional
|
||
data section of a response. This is now considered a bad idea
|
||
and BIND 9 never does it.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>flush-zones-on-shutdown</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>When the nameserver exits due receiving SIGTERM,
|
||
flush / do not flush any pending zone writes. The default is
|
||
<command>flush-zones-on-shutdown</command> <userinput>no</userinput>.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>has-old-clients</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>This option was incorrectly implemented
|
||
in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8, and is ignored by <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
|
||
To achieve the intended effect
|
||
of
|
||
<command>has-old-clients</command> <userinput>yes</userinput>, specify
|
||
the two separate options <command>auth-nxdomain</command> <userinput>yes</userinput>
|
||
and <command>rfc2308-type1</command> <userinput>no</userinput> instead.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>host-statistics</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>In BIND 8, this enables keeping of
|
||
statistics for every host that the name server interacts with.
|
||
Not implemented in BIND 9.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>maintain-ixfr-base</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para><emphasis>This option is obsolete</emphasis>.
|
||
It was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to determine whether a transaction log was
|
||
kept for Incremental Zone Transfer. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 maintains a transaction
|
||
log whenever possible. If you need to disable outgoing incremental zone
|
||
transfers, use <command>provide-ixfr</command> <userinput>no</userinput>.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>minimal-responses</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>If <userinput>yes</userinput>, then when generating
|
||
responses the server will only add records to the authority and
|
||
additional data sections when they are required (e.g. delegations,
|
||
negative responses). This may improve the performance of the server.
|
||
The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>multiple-cnames</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>This option was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to allow
|
||
a domain name to have multiple CNAME records in violation of the
|
||
DNS standards. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.2 always strictly
|
||
enforces the CNAME rules both in master files and dynamic updates.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>notify</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>If <userinput>yes</userinput> (the default),
|
||
DNS NOTIFY messages are sent when a zone the server is authoritative for
|
||
changes, see <xref linkend="notify"/>. The messages are sent to the
|
||
servers listed in the zone's NS records (except the master server identified
|
||
in the SOA MNAME field), and to any servers listed in the
|
||
<command>also-notify</command> option.
|
||
</para><para>
|
||
If <userinput>explicit</userinput>, notifies are sent only to
|
||
servers explicitly listed using <command>also-notify</command>.
|
||
If <userinput>no</userinput>, no notifies are sent.
|
||
</para><para>
|
||
The <command>notify</command> option may also be
|
||
specified in the <command>zone</command> statement,
|
||
in which case it overrides the <command>options notify</command> statement.
|
||
It would only be necessary to turn off this option if it caused slaves
|
||
to crash.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>recursion</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>If <userinput>yes</userinput>, and a
|
||
DNS query requests recursion, then the server will attempt to do
|
||
all the work required to answer the query. If recursion is off
|
||
and the server does not already know the answer, it will return a
|
||
referral response. The default is <userinput>yes</userinput>.
|
||
Note that setting <command>recursion no</command> does not prevent
|
||
clients from getting data from the server's cache; it only
|
||
prevents new data from being cached as an effect of client queries.
|
||
Caching may still occur as an effect the server's internal
|
||
operation, such as NOTIFY address lookups.
|
||
See also <command>fetch-glue</command> above.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>rfc2308-type1</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Setting this to <userinput>yes</userinput> will
|
||
cause the server to send NS records along with the SOA record for negative
|
||
answers. The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.</para>
|
||
<note><simpara>Not yet implemented in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.</simpara></note>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>use-id-pool</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para><emphasis>This option is obsolete</emphasis>.
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 always allocates query IDs from a pool.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>zone-statistics</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>If <userinput>yes</userinput>, the server will collect
|
||
statistical data on all zones (unless specifically turned off
|
||
on a per-zone basis by specifying <command>zone-statistics no</command>
|
||
in the <command>zone</command> statement). These statistics may be accessed
|
||
using <command>rndc stats</command>, which will dump them to the file listed
|
||
in the <command>statistics-file</command>. See also <xref linkend="statsfile"/>.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>use-ixfr</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para><emphasis>This option is obsolete</emphasis>.
|
||
If you need to disable IXFR to a particular server or servers see
|
||
the information on the <command>provide-ixfr</command> option
|
||
in <xref linkend="server_statement_definition_and_usage"/>. See also
|
||
<xref linkend="incremental_zone_transfers"/>.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>provide-ixfr</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>
|
||
See the description of
|
||
<command>provide-ixfr</command> in
|
||
<xref linkend="server_statement_definition_and_usage"/>
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>request-ixfr</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>
|
||
See the description of
|
||
<command>request-ixfr</command> in
|
||
<xref linkend="server_statement_definition_and_usage"/>
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>treat-cr-as-space</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>This option was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to make
|
||
the server treat carriage return ("<command>\r</command>") characters the same way
|
||
as a space or tab character,
|
||
to facilitate loading of zone files on a UNIX system that were generated
|
||
on an NT or DOS machine. In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, both UNIX "<command>\n</command>"
|
||
and NT/DOS "<command>\r\n</command>" newlines are always accepted,
|
||
and the option is ignored.</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry>
|
||
<term><command>additional-from-auth</command></term>
|
||
<term><command>additional-from-cache</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
These options control the behavior of an authoritative server when
|
||
answering queries which have additional data, or when following CNAME
|
||
and DNAME chains.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
When both of these options are set to <userinput>yes</userinput>
|
||
(the default) and a
|
||
query is being answered from authoritative data (a zone
|
||
configured into the server), the additional data section of the
|
||
reply will be filled in using data from other authoritative zones
|
||
and from the cache. In some situations this is undesirable, such
|
||
as when there is concern over the correctness of the cache, or
|
||
in servers where slave zones may be added and modified by
|
||
untrusted third parties. Also, avoiding
|
||
the search for this additional data will speed up server operations
|
||
at the possible expense of additional queries to resolve what would
|
||
otherwise be provided in the additional section.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
For example, if a query asks for an MX record for host <literal>foo.example.com</literal>,
|
||
and the record found is "<literal>MX 10 mail.example.net</literal>", normally the address
|
||
records (A and AAAA) for <literal>mail.example.net</literal> will be provided as well,
|
||
if known, even though they are not in the example.com zone.
|
||
Setting these options to <command>no</command> disables this behavior and makes
|
||
the server only search for additional data in the zone it answers from.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
These options are intended for use in authoritative-only
|
||
servers, or in authoritative-only views. Attempts to set
|
||
them to <command>no</command> without also specifying
|
||
<command>recursion no</command> will cause the server to
|
||
ignore the options and log a warning message.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Specifying <command>additional-from-cache no</command> actually
|
||
disables the use of the cache not only for additional data lookups
|
||
but also when looking up the answer. This is usually the desired
|
||
behavior in an authoritative-only server where the correctness of
|
||
the cached data is an issue.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
When a name server is non-recursively queried for a name that is not
|
||
below the apex of any served zone, it normally answers with an
|
||
"upwards referral" to the root servers or the servers of some other
|
||
known parent of the query name. Since the data in an upwards referral
|
||
comes from the cache, the server will not be able to provide upwards
|
||
referrals when <command>additional-from-cache no</command>
|
||
has been specified. Instead, it will respond to such queries
|
||
with REFUSED. This should not cause any problems since
|
||
upwards referrals are not required for the resolution process.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>match-mapped-addresses</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>If <userinput>yes</userinput>, then an
|
||
IPv4-mapped IPv6 address will match any address match
|
||
list entries that match the corresponding IPv4 address.
|
||
Enabling this option is sometimes useful on IPv6-enabled Linux
|
||
systems, to work around a kernel quirk that causes IPv4
|
||
TCP connections such as zone transfers to be accepted
|
||
on an IPv6 socket using mapped addresses, causing
|
||
address match lists designed for IPv4 to fail to match.
|
||
The use of this option for any other purpose is discouraged.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>ixfr-from-differences</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>
|
||
When 'yes' and the server loads a new version of a master
|
||
zone from its zone file or receives a new version of a slave
|
||
file by a non-incremental zone transfer, it will compare
|
||
the new version to the previous one and calculate a set
|
||
of differences. The differences are then logged in the
|
||
zone's journal file such that the changes can be transmitted
|
||
to downstream slaves as an incremental zone transfer.
|
||
</para><para>
|
||
By allowing incremental zone transfers to be used for
|
||
non-dynamic zones, this option saves bandwidth at the
|
||
expense of increased CPU and memory consumption at the master.
|
||
In particular, if the new version of a zone is completely
|
||
different from the previous one, the set of differences
|
||
will be of a size comparable to the combined size of the
|
||
old and new zone version, and the server will need to
|
||
temporarily allocate memory to hold this complete
|
||
difference set.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>multi-master</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>
|
||
This should be set when you have multiple masters for a zone and the
|
||
addresses refer to different machines. If 'yes' named will not log
|
||
when the serial number on the master is less than what named currently
|
||
has. The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>dnssec-enable</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>
|
||
Enable DNSSEC support in named. Unless set to <userinput>yes</userinput>
|
||
named behaves as if it does not support DNSSEC.
|
||
The default is <userinput>no</userinput>.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>querylog</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
<para>
|
||
Specify whether query logging should be started when named start.
|
||
If <command>querylog</command> is not specified then the query logging
|
||
is determined by the presence of the logging category <command>queries</command>.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>Forwarding</title>
|
||
<para>The forwarding facility can be used to create a large site-wide
|
||
cache on a few servers, reducing traffic over links to external
|
||
name servers. It can also be used to allow queries by servers that
|
||
do not have direct access to the Internet, but wish to look up exterior
|
||
names anyway. Forwarding occurs only on those queries for which
|
||
the server is not authoritative and does not have the answer in
|
||
its cache.</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>forward</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>This option is only meaningful if the
|
||
forwarders list is not empty. A value of <varname>first</varname>,
|
||
the default, causes the server to query the forwarders first, and
|
||
if that doesn't answer the question the server will then look for
|
||
the answer itself. If <varname>only</varname> is specified, the
|
||
server will only query the forwarders.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>forwarders</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies the IP addresses to be used
|
||
for forwarding. The default is the empty list (no forwarding).
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<para>Forwarding can also be configured on a per-domain basis, allowing
|
||
for the global forwarding options to be overridden in a variety
|
||
of ways. You can set particular domains to use different forwarders,
|
||
or have a different <command>forward only/first</command> behavior,
|
||
or not forward at all, see <xref linkend="zone_statement_grammar"/>.</para>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>Dual-stack Servers</title>
|
||
<para>Dual-stack servers are used as servers of last resort to work around
|
||
problems in reachability due the lack of support for either IPv4 or IPv6
|
||
on the host machine.</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>dual-stack-servers</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies host names / addresses of machines with access to
|
||
both IPv4 and IPv6 transports. If a hostname is used the server must be able
|
||
to resolve the name using only the transport it has. If the machine is dual
|
||
stacked then the <command>dual-stack-servers</command> have no effect unless
|
||
access to a transport has been disabled on the command line
|
||
(e.g. <command>named -4</command>).</para></listitem>
|
||
</varlistentry>
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="access_control"><title>Access Control</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Access to the server can be restricted based on the IP address
|
||
of the requesting system. See <xref linkend="address_match_lists"/> for
|
||
details on how to specify IP address lists.</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-notify</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies which hosts are allowed to
|
||
notify this server, a slave, of zone changes in addition
|
||
to the zone masters.
|
||
<command>allow-notify</command> may also be specified in the
|
||
<command>zone</command> statement, in which case it overrides the
|
||
<command>options allow-notify</command> statement. It is only meaningful
|
||
for a slave zone. If not specified, the default is to process notify messages
|
||
only from a zone's master.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-query</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies which hosts are allowed to
|
||
ask ordinary DNS questions. <command>allow-query</command> may also
|
||
be specified in the <command>zone</command> statement, in which
|
||
case it overrides the <command>options allow-query</command> statement. If
|
||
not specified, the default is to allow queries from all hosts.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-recursion</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies which hosts are allowed to
|
||
make recursive queries through this server. If not specified, the
|
||
default is to allow recursive queries from all hosts.
|
||
Note that disallowing recursive queries for a host does not prevent the
|
||
host from retrieving data that is already in the server's cache.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-update-forwarding</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies which hosts are allowed to
|
||
submit Dynamic DNS updates to slave zones to be forwarded to the
|
||
master. The default is <userinput>{ none; }</userinput>, which
|
||
means that no update forwarding will be performed. To enable
|
||
update forwarding, specify
|
||
<userinput>allow-update-forwarding { any; };</userinput>.
|
||
Specifying values other than <userinput>{ none; }</userinput> or
|
||
<userinput>{ any; }</userinput> is usually counterproductive, since
|
||
the responsibility for update access control should rest with the
|
||
master server, not the slaves.</para>
|
||
<para>Note that enabling the update forwarding feature on a slave server
|
||
may expose master servers relying on insecure IP address based
|
||
access control to attacks; see <xref linkend="dynamic_update_security"/>
|
||
for more details.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-v6-synthesis</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>This option was introduced for the smooth transition from AAAA
|
||
to A6 and from "nibble labels" to binary labels.
|
||
However, since both A6 and binary labels were then deprecated,
|
||
this option was also deprecated.
|
||
It is now ignored with some warning messages.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-transfer</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies which hosts are allowed to
|
||
receive zone transfers from the server. <command>allow-transfer</command> may
|
||
also be specified in the <command>zone</command> statement, in which
|
||
case it overrides the <command>options allow-transfer</command> statement.
|
||
If not specified, the default is to allow transfers to all hosts.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>blackhole</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies a list of addresses that the
|
||
server will not accept queries from or use to resolve a query. Queries
|
||
from these addresses will not be responded to. The default is <userinput>none</userinput>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>Interfaces</title>
|
||
<para>The interfaces and ports that the server will answer queries
|
||
from may be specified using the <command>listen-on</command> option. <command>listen-on</command> takes
|
||
an optional port, and an <varname>address_match_list</varname>.
|
||
The server will listen on all interfaces allowed by the address
|
||
match list. If a port is not specified, port 53 will be used.</para>
|
||
<para>Multiple <command>listen-on</command> statements are allowed.
|
||
For example,</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>listen-on { 5.6.7.8; };
|
||
listen-on port 1234 { !1.2.3.4; 1.2/16; };
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
<para>will enable the name server on port 53 for the IP address
|
||
5.6.7.8, and on port 1234 of an address on the machine in net
|
||
1.2 that is not 1.2.3.4.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>If no <command>listen-on</command> is specified, the
|
||
server will listen on port 53 on all interfaces.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>listen-on-v6</command> option is used to
|
||
specify the interfaces and the ports on which the server will listen
|
||
for incoming queries sent using IPv6.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>When <programlisting>{ any; }</programlisting> is specified
|
||
as the <varname>address_match_list</varname> for the
|
||
<command>listen-on-v6</command> option,
|
||
the server does not bind a separate socket to each IPv6 interface
|
||
address as it does for IPv4 if the operating system has enough API
|
||
support for IPv6 (specifically if it conforms to RFC 3493 and RFC 3542).
|
||
Instead, it listens on the IPv6 wildcard address.
|
||
If the system only has incomplete API support for IPv6, however,
|
||
the behavior is the same as that for IPv4.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>A list of particular IPv6 addresses can also be specified, in which case
|
||
the server listens on a separate socket for each specified address,
|
||
regardless of whether the desired API is supported by the system.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Multiple <command>listen-on-v6</command> options can be used.
|
||
For example,</para>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>listen-on-v6 { any; };
|
||
listen-on-v6 port 1234 { !2001:db8::/32; any; };
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
<para>will enable the name server on port 53 for any IPv6 addresses
|
||
(with a single wildcard socket),
|
||
and on port 1234 of IPv6 addresses that is not in the prefix
|
||
2001:db8::/32 (with separate sockets for each matched address.)</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>To make the server not listen on any IPv6 address, use</para>
|
||
<programlisting>listen-on-v6 { none; };
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>If no <command>listen-on-v6</command> option is specified,
|
||
the server will not listen on any IPv6 address.</para></sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>Query Address</title>
|
||
<para>If the server doesn't know the answer to a question, it will
|
||
query other name servers. <command>query-source</command> specifies
|
||
the address and port used for such queries. For queries sent over
|
||
IPv6, there is a separate <command>query-source-v6</command> option.
|
||
If <command>address</command> is <command>*</command> or is omitted,
|
||
a wildcard IP address (<command>INADDR_ANY</command>) will be used.
|
||
If <command>port</command> is <command>*</command> or is omitted,
|
||
a random unprivileged port will be used, <command>avoid-v4-udp-ports</command>
|
||
and <command>avoid-v6-udp-ports</command> can be used to prevent named
|
||
from selecting certain ports. The defaults are</para>
|
||
<programlisting>query-source address * port *;
|
||
query-source-v6 address * port *;
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<note>
|
||
<para>The address specified in the <command>query-source</command> option
|
||
is used for both UDP and TCP queries, but the port applies only to
|
||
UDP queries. TCP queries always use a random
|
||
unprivileged port.</para></note>
|
||
<note>
|
||
<para>See also <command>transfer-source</command> and
|
||
<command>notify-source</command>.</para></note>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="zone_transfers"><title>Zone Transfers</title>
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> has mechanisms in place to facilitate zone transfers
|
||
and set limits on the amount of load that transfers place on the
|
||
system. The following options apply to zone transfers.</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>also-notify</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Defines a global list of IP addresses of name servers
|
||
that are also sent NOTIFY messages whenever a fresh copy of the
|
||
zone is loaded, in addition to the servers listed in the zone's NS records.
|
||
This helps to ensure that copies of the zones will
|
||
quickly converge on stealth servers. If an <command>also-notify</command> list
|
||
is given in a <command>zone</command> statement, it will override
|
||
the <command>options also-notify</command> statement. When a <command>zone notify</command> statement
|
||
is set to <command>no</command>, the IP addresses in the global <command>also-notify</command> list will
|
||
not be sent NOTIFY messages for that zone. The default is the empty
|
||
list (no global notification list).</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-transfer-time-in</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Inbound zone transfers running longer than
|
||
this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120 minutes
|
||
(2 hours). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-transfer-idle-in</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Inbound zone transfers making no progress
|
||
in this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 60 minutes
|
||
(1 hour). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-transfer-time-out</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Outbound zone transfers running longer than
|
||
this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 120 minutes
|
||
(2 hours). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-transfer-idle-out</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Outbound zone transfers making no progress
|
||
in this many minutes will be terminated. The default is 60 minutes (1
|
||
hour). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>serial-query-rate</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Slave servers will periodically query master servers
|
||
to find out if zone serial numbers have changed. Each such query uses
|
||
a minute amount of the slave server's network bandwidth. To limit the
|
||
amount of bandwidth used, BIND 9 limits the rate at which queries are
|
||
sent. The value of the <command>serial-query-rate</command> option,
|
||
an integer, is the maximum number of queries sent per second.
|
||
The default is 20.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>serial-queries</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>In BIND 8, the <command>serial-queries</command> option
|
||
set the maximum number of concurrent serial number queries
|
||
allowed to be outstanding at any given time.
|
||
BIND 9 does not limit the number of outstanding
|
||
serial queries and ignores the <command>serial-queries</command> option.
|
||
Instead, it limits the rate at which the queries are sent
|
||
as defined using the <command>serial-query-rate</command> option.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>transfer-format</command></term>
|
||
<listitem>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Zone transfers can be sent using two different formats,
|
||
<command>one-answer</command> and <command>many-answers</command>.
|
||
The <command>transfer-format</command> option is used
|
||
on the master server to determine which format it sends.
|
||
<command>one-answer</command> uses one DNS message per
|
||
resource record transferred.
|
||
<command>many-answers</command> packs as many resource records as
|
||
possible into a message. <command>many-answers</command> is more
|
||
efficient, but is only supported by relatively new slave servers,
|
||
such as <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8.x and patched
|
||
versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 4.9.5. The default is
|
||
<command>many-answers</command>. <command>transfer-format</command>
|
||
may be overridden on a per-server basis by using the
|
||
<command>server</command> statement.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>transfers-in</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
|
||
that can be running concurrently. The default value is <literal>10</literal>.
|
||
Increasing <command>transfers-in</command> may speed up the convergence
|
||
of slave zones, but it also may increase the load on the local system.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>transfers-out</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum number of outbound zone transfers
|
||
that can be running concurrently. Zone transfer requests in excess
|
||
of the limit will be refused. The default value is <literal>10</literal>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>transfers-per-ns</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum number of inbound zone transfers
|
||
that can be concurrently transferring from a given remote name server.
|
||
The default value is <literal>2</literal>. Increasing <command>transfers-per-ns</command> may
|
||
speed up the convergence of slave zones, but it also may increase
|
||
the load on the remote name server. <command>transfers-per-ns</command> may
|
||
be overridden on a per-server basis by using the <command>transfers</command> phrase
|
||
of the <command>server</command> statement.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>transfer-source</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para><command>transfer-source</command> determines
|
||
which local address will be bound to IPv4 TCP connections used to
|
||
fetch zones transferred inbound by the server. It also determines
|
||
the source IPv4 address, and optionally the UDP port, used for the
|
||
refresh queries and forwarded dynamic updates. If not set, it defaults
|
||
to a system controlled value which will usually be the address of
|
||
the interface "closest to" the remote end. This address must appear
|
||
in the remote end's <command>allow-transfer</command> option for
|
||
the zone being transferred, if one is specified. This statement
|
||
sets the <command>transfer-source</command> for all zones, but can
|
||
be overridden on a per-view or per-zone basis by including a
|
||
<command>transfer-source</command> statement within the
|
||
<command>view</command> or <command>zone</command> block
|
||
in the configuration file.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>transfer-source-v6</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The same as <command>transfer-source</command>,
|
||
except zone transfers are performed using IPv6.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>alt-transfer-source</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
|
||
<command>transfer-source</command> fails and
|
||
<command>use-alt-transfer-source</command> is set.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>alt-transfer-source-v6</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>An alternate transfer source if the one listed in
|
||
<command>transfer-source-v6</command> fails and
|
||
<command>use-alt-transfer-source</command> is set.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>use-alt-transfer-source</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Use the alternate transfer sources or not. If views are
|
||
specified this defaults to <command>no</command> otherwise it defaults to
|
||
<command>yes</command> (for BIND 8 compatibility).</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>notify-source</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para><command>notify-source</command> determines
|
||
which local source address, and optionally UDP port, will be used to
|
||
send NOTIFY messages.
|
||
This address must appear in the slave server's <command>masters</command>
|
||
zone clause or in an <command>allow-notify</command> clause.
|
||
This statement sets the <command>notify-source</command> for all zones,
|
||
but can be overridden on a per-zone / per-view basis by including a
|
||
<command>notify-source</command> statement within the <command>zone</command>
|
||
or <command>view</command> block in the configuration file.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>notify-source-v6</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Like <command>notify-source</command>,
|
||
but applies to notify messages sent to IPv6 addresses.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3>
|
||
<title>Bad UDP Port Lists</title>
|
||
<para>
|
||
<command>avoid-v4-udp-ports</command> and <command>avoid-v6-udp-ports</command>
|
||
specify a list of IPv4 and IPv6 UDP ports that will not be used as system
|
||
assigned source ports for UDP sockets. These lists prevent named
|
||
from choosing as its random source port a port that is blocked by
|
||
your firewall. If a query went out with such a source port, the
|
||
answer would not get by the firewall and the name server would have
|
||
to query again.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3>
|
||
<title>Operating System Resource Limits</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The server's usage of many system resources can be limited.
|
||
Scaled values are allowed when specifying resource limits. For
|
||
example, <command>1G</command> can be used instead of
|
||
<command>1073741824</command> to specify a limit of one
|
||
gigabyte. <command>unlimited</command> requests unlimited use, or the
|
||
maximum available amount. <command>default</command> uses the limit
|
||
that was in force when the server was started. See the description of
|
||
<command>size_spec</command> in <xref
|
||
linkend="configuration_file_elements"/>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The following options set operating system resource limits for
|
||
the name server process. Some operating systems don't support some or
|
||
any of the limits. On such systems, a warning will be issued if the
|
||
unsupported limit is used.</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>coresize</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum size of a core dump. The default
|
||
is <literal>default</literal>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>datasize</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum amount of data memory the server
|
||
may use. The default is <literal>default</literal>.
|
||
This is a hard limit on server memory usage.
|
||
If the server attempts to allocate memory in excess of this
|
||
limit, the allocation will fail, which may in turn leave
|
||
the server unable to perform DNS service. Therefore,
|
||
this option is rarely useful as a way of limiting the
|
||
amount of memory used by the server, but it can be used
|
||
to raise an operating system data size limit that is
|
||
too small by default. If you wish to limit the amount
|
||
of memory used by the server, use the
|
||
<command>max-cache-size</command> and
|
||
<command>recursive-clients</command>
|
||
options instead.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>files</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum number of files the server
|
||
may have open concurrently. The default is <literal>unlimited</literal>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>stacksize</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum amount of stack memory the server
|
||
may use. The default is <literal>default</literal>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3>
|
||
<title>Server Resource Limits</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The following options set limits on the server's
|
||
resource consumption that are enforced internally by the
|
||
server rather than the operating system.</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-ixfr-log-size</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>This option is obsolete; it is accepted
|
||
and ignored for BIND 8 compatibility. The option
|
||
<command>max-journal-size</command> performs a similar
|
||
function in BIND 8.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-journal-size</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Sets a maximum size for each journal file
|
||
(<xref linkend="journal"/>). When the journal file approaches
|
||
the specified size, some of the oldest transactions in the journal
|
||
will be automatically removed. The default is
|
||
<literal>unlimited</literal>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>recursive-clients</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum number of simultaneous recursive lookups
|
||
the server will perform on behalf of clients. The default is
|
||
<literal>1000</literal>. Because each recursing client uses a fair
|
||
bit of memory, on the order of 20 kilobytes, the value of the
|
||
<command>recursive-clients</command> option may have to be decreased
|
||
on hosts with limited memory.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>tcp-clients</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum number of simultaneous client TCP
|
||
connections that the server will accept.
|
||
The default is <literal>100</literal>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-cache-size</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The maximum amount of memory to use for the
|
||
server's cache, in bytes. When the amount of data in the cache
|
||
reaches this limit, the server will cause records to expire
|
||
prematurely so that the limit is not exceeded. In a server with
|
||
multiple views, the limit applies separately to the cache of each
|
||
view. The default is <literal>unlimited</literal>, meaning that
|
||
records are purged from the cache only when their TTLs expire.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>tcp-listen-queue</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The listen queue depth. The default and minimum is 3.
|
||
If the kernel supports the accept filter "dataready" this also controls how
|
||
many TCP connections that will be queued in kernel space waiting for
|
||
some data before being passed to accept. Values less than 3 will be
|
||
silently raised.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>Periodic Task Intervals</title>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>cleaning-interval</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The server will remove expired resource records
|
||
from the cache every <command>cleaning-interval</command> minutes.
|
||
The default is 60 minutes. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
|
||
If set to 0, no periodic cleaning will occur.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>heartbeat-interval</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The server will perform zone maintenance tasks
|
||
for all zones marked as <command>dialup</command> whenever this
|
||
interval expires. The default is 60 minutes. Reasonable values are up
|
||
to 1 day (1440 minutes). The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
|
||
If set to 0, no zone maintenance for these zones will occur.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>interface-interval</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The server will scan the network interface list
|
||
every <command>interface-interval</command> minutes. The default
|
||
is 60 minutes. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
|
||
If set to 0, interface scanning will only occur when
|
||
the configuration file is loaded. After the scan, the server will
|
||
begin listening for queries on any newly discovered
|
||
interfaces (provided they are allowed by the
|
||
<command>listen-on</command> configuration), and will
|
||
stop listening on interfaces that have gone away.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>statistics-interval</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Name server statistics will be logged
|
||
every <command>statistics-interval</command> minutes. The default is
|
||
60. The maximum value is 28 days (40320 minutes).
|
||
If set to 0, no statistics will be logged.</para><note>
|
||
<simpara>Not yet implemented in <acronym>BIND</acronym>9.</simpara></note>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="topology"><title>Topology</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>All other things being equal, when the server chooses a name server
|
||
to query from a list of name servers, it prefers the one that is
|
||
topologically closest to itself. The <command>topology</command> statement
|
||
takes an <command>address_match_list</command> and interprets it
|
||
in a special way. Each top-level list element is assigned a distance.
|
||
Non-negated elements get a distance based on their position in the
|
||
list, where the closer the match is to the start of the list, the
|
||
shorter the distance is between it and the server. A negated match
|
||
will be assigned the maximum distance from the server. If there
|
||
is no match, the address will get a distance which is further than
|
||
any non-negated list element, and closer than any negated element.
|
||
For example,</para>
|
||
<programlisting>topology {
|
||
10/8;
|
||
!1.2.3/24;
|
||
{ 1.2/16; 3/8; };
|
||
};</programlisting>
|
||
<para>will prefer servers on network 10 the most, followed by hosts
|
||
on network 1.2.0.0 (netmask 255.255.0.0) and network 3, with the
|
||
exception of hosts on network 1.2.3 (netmask 255.255.255.0), which
|
||
is preferred least of all.</para>
|
||
<para>The default topology is</para>
|
||
<programlisting> topology { localhost; localnets; };
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<note><simpara>The <command>topology</command> option
|
||
is not implemented in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
|
||
</simpara></note>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="the_sortlist_statement">
|
||
|
||
<title>The <command>sortlist</command> Statement</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The response to a DNS query may consist of multiple resource
|
||
records (RRs) forming a resource records set (RRset).
|
||
The name server will normally return the
|
||
RRs within the RRset in an indeterminate order
|
||
(but see the <command>rrset-order</command>
|
||
statement in <xref linkend="rrset_ordering"/>).
|
||
The client resolver code should rearrange the RRs as appropriate,
|
||
that is, using any addresses on the local net in preference to other addresses.
|
||
However, not all resolvers can do this or are correctly configured.
|
||
When a client is using a local server the sorting can be performed
|
||
in the server, based on the client's address. This only requires
|
||
configuring the name servers, not all the clients.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>sortlist</command> statement (see below) takes
|
||
an <command>address_match_list</command> and interprets it even
|
||
more specifically than the <command>topology</command> statement
|
||
does (<xref linkend="topology"/>).
|
||
Each top level statement in the <command>sortlist</command> must
|
||
itself be an explicit <command>address_match_list</command> with
|
||
one or two elements. The first element (which may be an IP address,
|
||
an IP prefix, an ACL name or a nested <command>address_match_list</command>)
|
||
of each top level list is checked against the source address of
|
||
the query until a match is found.</para>
|
||
<para>Once the source address of the query has been matched, if
|
||
the top level statement contains only one element, the actual primitive
|
||
element that matched the source address is used to select the address
|
||
in the response to move to the beginning of the response. If the
|
||
statement is a list of two elements, then the second element is
|
||
treated the same as the <command>address_match_list</command> in
|
||
a <command>topology</command> statement. Each top level element
|
||
is assigned a distance and the address in the response with the minimum
|
||
distance is moved to the beginning of the response.</para>
|
||
<para>In the following example, any queries received from any of
|
||
the addresses of the host itself will get responses preferring addresses
|
||
on any of the locally connected networks. Next most preferred are addresses
|
||
on the 192.168.1/24 network, and after that either the 192.168.2/24
|
||
or
|
||
192.168.3/24 network with no preference shown between these two
|
||
networks. Queries received from a host on the 192.168.1/24 network
|
||
will prefer other addresses on that network to the 192.168.2/24
|
||
and
|
||
192.168.3/24 networks. Queries received from a host on the 192.168.4/24
|
||
or the 192.168.5/24 network will only prefer other addresses on
|
||
their directly connected networks.</para>
|
||
<programlisting>sortlist {
|
||
{ localhost; // IF the local host
|
||
{ localnets; // THEN first fit on the
|
||
192.168.1/24; // following nets
|
||
{ 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
|
||
{ 192.168.1/24; // IF on class C 192.168.1
|
||
{ 192.168.1/24; // THEN use .1, or .2 or .3
|
||
{ 192.168.2/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
|
||
{ 192.168.2/24; // IF on class C 192.168.2
|
||
{ 192.168.2/24; // THEN use .2, or .1 or .3
|
||
{ 192.168.1/24; 192.168.3/24; }; }; };
|
||
{ 192.168.3/24; // IF on class C 192.168.3
|
||
{ 192.168.3/24; // THEN use .3, or .1 or .2
|
||
{ 192.168.1/24; 192.168.2/24; }; }; };
|
||
{ { 192.168.4/24; 192.168.5/24; }; // if .4 or .5, prefer that net
|
||
};
|
||
};</programlisting>
|
||
<para>The following example will give reasonable behavior for the
|
||
local host and hosts on directly connected networks. It is similar
|
||
to the behavior of the address sort in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 4.9.x. Responses sent
|
||
to queries from the local host will favor any of the directly connected
|
||
networks. Responses sent to queries from any other hosts on a directly
|
||
connected network will prefer addresses on that same network. Responses
|
||
to other queries will not be sorted.</para>
|
||
<programlisting>sortlist {
|
||
{ localhost; localnets; };
|
||
{ localnets; };
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
<sect3 id="rrset_ordering"><title id="rrset_ordering_title">RRset Ordering</title>
|
||
<para>When multiple records are returned in an answer it may be
|
||
useful to configure the order of the records placed into the response.
|
||
The <command>rrset-order</command> statement permits configuration
|
||
of the ordering of the records in a multiple record response.
|
||
See also the <command>sortlist</command> statement,
|
||
<xref linkend="the_sortlist_statement"/>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>An <command>order_spec</command> is defined as follows:</para>
|
||
<programlisting><optional> class <replaceable>class_name</replaceable> </optional><optional> type <replaceable>type_name</replaceable> </optional><optional> name <replaceable>"domain_name"</replaceable></optional>
|
||
order <replaceable>ordering</replaceable>
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>If no class is specified, the default is <command>ANY</command>.
|
||
If no type is specified, the default is <command>ANY</command>.
|
||
If no name is specified, the default is "<command>*</command>".</para>
|
||
<para>The legal values for <command>ordering</command> are:</para>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "2"
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.750in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.750in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>fixed</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Records are returned in the order they
|
||
are defined in the zone file.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>random</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Records are returned in some random order.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>cyclic</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Records are returned in a round-robin
|
||
order.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<para>For example:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>rrset-order {
|
||
class IN type A name "host.example.com" order random;
|
||
order cyclic;
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>will cause any responses for type A records in class IN that
|
||
have "<literal>host.example.com</literal>" as a suffix, to always be returned
|
||
in random order. All other records are returned in cyclic order.</para>
|
||
<para>If multiple <command>rrset-order</command> statements appear,
|
||
they are not combined — the last one applies.</para>
|
||
|
||
<note>
|
||
<simpara>The <command>rrset-order</command> statement
|
||
is not yet fully implemented in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.
|
||
BIND 9 currently does not support "fixed" ordering.
|
||
</simpara></note>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="tuning"><title>Tuning</title>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>lame-ttl</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Sets the number of seconds to cache a
|
||
lame server indication. 0 disables caching. (This is
|
||
<emphasis role="bold">NOT</emphasis> recommended.)
|
||
Default is <literal>600</literal> (10 minutes). Maximum value is
|
||
<literal>1800</literal> (30 minutes).</para>
|
||
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-ncache-ttl</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>To reduce network traffic and increase performance
|
||
the server stores negative answers. <command>max-ncache-ttl</command> is
|
||
used to set a maximum retention time for these answers in the server
|
||
in seconds. The default
|
||
<command>max-ncache-ttl</command> is <literal>10800</literal> seconds (3 hours).
|
||
<command>max-ncache-ttl</command> cannot exceed 7 days and will
|
||
be silently truncated to 7 days if set to a greater value.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-cache-ttl</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para><command>max-cache-ttl</command> sets
|
||
the maximum time for which the server will cache ordinary (positive)
|
||
answers. The default is one week (7 days).</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>min-roots</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The minimum number of root servers that
|
||
is required for a request for the root servers to be accepted. Default
|
||
is <userinput>2</userinput>.</para>
|
||
<note>
|
||
<simpara>Not implemented in <acronym>BIND</acronym>9.</simpara></note>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>sig-validity-interval</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies the number of days into the
|
||
future when DNSSEC signatures automatically generated as a result
|
||
of dynamic updates (<xref linkend="dynamic_update"/>)
|
||
will expire. The default is <literal>30</literal> days.
|
||
The maximum value is 10 years (3660 days). The signature
|
||
inception time is unconditionally set to one hour before the current time
|
||
to allow for a limited amount of clock skew.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry>
|
||
<term><command>min-refresh-time</command></term>
|
||
<term><command>max-refresh-time</command></term>
|
||
<term><command>min-retry-time</command></term>
|
||
<term><command>max-retry-time</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
These options control the server's behavior on refreshing a zone
|
||
(querying for SOA changes) or retrying failed transfers.
|
||
Usually the SOA values for the zone are used, but these values
|
||
are set by the master, giving slave server administrators little
|
||
control over their contents.
|
||
</para><para>
|
||
These options allow the administrator to set a minimum and maximum
|
||
refresh and retry time either per-zone, per-view, or globally.
|
||
These options are valid for slave and stub zones,
|
||
and clamp the SOA refresh and retry times to the specified values.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry>
|
||
<term><command>edns-udp-size</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
<command>edns-udp-size</command> sets the advertised EDNS UDP buffer
|
||
size. Valid values are 512 to 4096 (values outside this range will be
|
||
silently adjusted). The default value is 4096. The usual reason for
|
||
setting edns-udp-size to a non default value it to get UDP answers to
|
||
pass through broken firewalls that block fragmented packets and/or
|
||
block UDP packets that are greater than 512 bytes.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="builtin">
|
||
<title>Built-in server information zones</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The server provides some helpful diagnostic information
|
||
through a number of built-in zones under the
|
||
pseudo-top-level-domain <literal>bind</literal> in the
|
||
<command>CHAOS</command> class. These zones are part of a
|
||
built-in view (see <xref linkend="view_statement_grammar"/>) of class
|
||
<command>CHAOS</command> which is separate from the default view of
|
||
class <command>IN</command>; therefore, any global server options
|
||
such as <command>allow-query</command> do not apply the these zones.
|
||
If you feel the need to disable these zones, use the options
|
||
below, or hide the built-in <command>CHAOS</command> view by
|
||
defining an explicit view of class <command>CHAOS</command>
|
||
that matches all clients.</para>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>version</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The version the server should report
|
||
via a query of the name <literal>version.bind</literal>
|
||
with type <command>TXT</command>, class <command>CHAOS</command>.
|
||
The default is the real version number of this server.
|
||
Specifying <command>version none</command>
|
||
disables processing of the queries.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>hostname</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The hostname the server should report via a query of
|
||
the name <filename>hostname.bind</filename>
|
||
with type <command>TXT</command>, class <command>CHAOS</command>.
|
||
This defaults to the hostname of the machine hosting the name server as
|
||
found by gethostname(). The primary purpose of such queries is to
|
||
identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
|
||
answering your queries. Specifying <command>hostname none;</command>
|
||
disables processing of the queries.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>server-id</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The ID of the server should report via a query of
|
||
the name <filename>ID.SERVER</filename>
|
||
with type <command>TXT</command>, class <command>CHAOS</command>.
|
||
The primary purpose of such queries is to
|
||
identify which of a group of anycast servers is actually
|
||
answering your queries. Specifying <command>server-id none;</command>
|
||
disables processing of the queries.
|
||
Specifying <command>server-id hostname;</command> will cause named to
|
||
use the hostname as found by gethostname().
|
||
The default <command>server-id</command> is <command>none</command>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3 id="statsfile">
|
||
<title>The Statistics File</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The statistics file generated by <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9
|
||
is similar, but not identical, to that
|
||
generated by <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8.
|
||
</para>
|
||
<para>The statistics dump begins with the line <command>+++ Statistics Dump
|
||
+++ (973798949)</command>, where the number in parentheses is a standard
|
||
Unix-style timestamp, measured as seconds since January 1, 1970. Following
|
||
that line are a series of lines containing a counter type, the value of the
|
||
counter, optionally a zone name, and optionally a view name.
|
||
The lines without view and zone listed are global statistics for the entire server.
|
||
Lines with a zone and view name for the given view and zone (the view name is
|
||
omitted for the default view). The statistics dump ends
|
||
with the line <command>--- Statistics Dump --- (973798949)</command>, where the
|
||
number is identical to the number in the beginning line.</para>
|
||
<para>The following statistics counters are maintained:</para>
|
||
<informaltable
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "2"
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.150in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.350in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>success</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The number of
|
||
successful queries made to the server or zone. A successful query
|
||
is defined as query which returns a NOERROR response with at least
|
||
one answer RR.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>referral</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The number of queries which resulted
|
||
in referral responses.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>nxrrset</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The number of queries which resulted in
|
||
NOERROR responses with no data.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>nxdomain</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The number
|
||
of queries which resulted in NXDOMAIN responses.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>failure</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The number of queries which resulted in a
|
||
failure response other than those above.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>recursion</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The number of queries which caused the server
|
||
to perform recursion in order to find the final answer.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
Each query received by the server will cause exactly one of
|
||
<command>success</command>,
|
||
<command>referral</command>,
|
||
<command>nxrrset</command>,
|
||
<command>nxdomain</command>, or
|
||
<command>failure</command>
|
||
to be incremented, and may additionally cause the
|
||
<command>recursion</command> counter to be incremented.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2 id="server_statement_grammar">
|
||
<title><command>server</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
|
||
<programlisting>server <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> {
|
||
<optional> bogus <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> provide-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> request-ixfr <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> edns <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfers <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfer-format <replaceable>( one-answer | many-answers )</replaceable> ; ]</optional>
|
||
<optional> keys <replaceable>{ string ; <optional> string ; <optional>...</optional></optional> }</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2 id="server_statement_definition_and_usage">
|
||
<title><command>server</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>server</command> statement defines characteristics
|
||
to be associated with a remote name server.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>
|
||
The <command>server</command> statement can occur at the top level of the
|
||
configuration file or inside a <command>view</command> statement.
|
||
If a <command>view</command> statement contains
|
||
one or more <command>server</command> statements, only those
|
||
apply to the view and any top-level ones are ignored.
|
||
If a view contains no <command>server</command> statements,
|
||
any top-level <command>server</command> statements are used as
|
||
defaults.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>If you discover that a remote server is giving out bad data,
|
||
marking it as bogus will prevent further queries to it. The default
|
||
value of <command>bogus</command> is <command>no</command>.</para>
|
||
<para>The <command>provide-ixfr</command> clause determines whether
|
||
the local server, acting as master, will respond with an incremental
|
||
zone transfer when the given remote server, a slave, requests it.
|
||
If set to <command>yes</command>, incremental transfer will be provided
|
||
whenever possible. If set to <command>no</command>, all transfers
|
||
to the remote server will be non-incremental. If not set, the value
|
||
of the <command>provide-ixfr</command> option in the view or
|
||
global options block is used as a default.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>request-ixfr</command> clause determines whether
|
||
the local server, acting as a slave, will request incremental zone
|
||
transfers from the given remote server, a master. If not set, the
|
||
value of the <command>request-ixfr</command> option in the view or
|
||
global options block is used as a default.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>IXFR requests to servers that do not support IXFR will automatically
|
||
fall back to AXFR. Therefore, there is no need to manually list
|
||
which servers support IXFR and which ones do not; the global default
|
||
of <command>yes</command> should always work.
|
||
The purpose of the <command>provide-ixfr</command> and
|
||
<command>request-ixfr</command> clauses is
|
||
to make it possible to disable the use of IXFR even when both master
|
||
and slave claim to support it, for example if one of the servers
|
||
is buggy and crashes or corrupts data when IXFR is used.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>edns</command> clause determines whether the local server
|
||
will attempt to use EDNS when communicating with the remote server. The
|
||
default is <command>yes</command>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The server supports two zone transfer methods. The first, <command>one-answer</command>,
|
||
uses one DNS message per resource record transferred. <command>many-answers</command> packs
|
||
as many resource records as possible into a message. <command>many-answers</command> is
|
||
more efficient, but is only known to be understood by <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9, <acronym>BIND</acronym>
|
||
8.x, and patched versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 4.9.5. You can specify which method
|
||
to use for a server with the <command>transfer-format</command> option.
|
||
If <command>transfer-format</command> is not specified, the <command>transfer-format</command> specified
|
||
by the <command>options</command> statement will be used.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para><command>transfers</command> is used to limit the number of
|
||
concurrent inbound zone transfers from the specified server. If
|
||
no <command>transfers</command> clause is specified, the limit is
|
||
set according to the <command>transfers-per-ns</command> option.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>keys</command> clause identifies a
|
||
<command>key_id</command> defined by the <command>key</command> statement,
|
||
to be used for transaction security (TSIG, <xref linkend="tsig"/>)
|
||
when talking to the remote server.
|
||
When a request is sent to the remote server, a request signature
|
||
will be generated using the key specified here and appended to the
|
||
message. A request originating from the remote server is not required
|
||
to be signed by this key.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Although the grammar of the <command>keys</command> clause
|
||
allows for multiple keys, only a single key per server is currently
|
||
supported.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>transfer-source</command> and
|
||
<command>transfer-source-v6</command> clauses specify the IPv4 and IPv6 source
|
||
address to be used for zone transfer with the remote server, respectively.
|
||
For an IPv4 remote server, only <command>transfer-source</command> can
|
||
be specified.
|
||
Similarly, for an IPv6 remote server, only
|
||
<command>transfer-source-v6</command> can be specified.
|
||
Form more details, see the description of
|
||
<command>transfer-source</command> and
|
||
<command>transfer-source-v6</command> in
|
||
<xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title><command>trusted-keys</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
<programlisting>trusted-keys {
|
||
<replaceable>string</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>string</replaceable> ;
|
||
<optional> <replaceable>string</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; <optional>...</optional></optional>
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2><title><command>trusted-keys</command> Statement Definition
|
||
and Usage</title>
|
||
<para>The <command>trusted-keys</command> statement defines DNSSEC
|
||
security roots. DNSSEC is described in <xref linkend="DNSSEC"/>. A security root is defined when the public key for a non-authoritative
|
||
zone is known, but cannot be securely obtained through DNS, either
|
||
because it is the DNS root zone or because its parent zone is unsigned.
|
||
Once a key has been configured as a trusted key, it is treated as
|
||
if it had been validated and proven secure. The resolver attempts
|
||
DNSSEC validation on all DNS data in subdomains of a security root.</para>
|
||
<para>The <command>trusted-keys</command> statement can contain
|
||
multiple key entries, each consisting of the key's domain name,
|
||
flags, protocol, algorithm, and the base-64 representation of the
|
||
key data.</para></sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2 id="view_statement_grammar">
|
||
<title><command>view</command> Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
<programlisting>view <replaceable>view_name</replaceable>
|
||
<optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> {
|
||
match-clients { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> } ;
|
||
match-destinations { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> } ;
|
||
match-recursive-only <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ;
|
||
<optional> <replaceable>view_option</replaceable>; ...</optional>
|
||
<optional> <replaceable>zone_statement</replaceable>; ...</optional>
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting></sect2>
|
||
<sect2><title><command>view</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <command>view</command> statement is a powerful new feature
|
||
of <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 that lets a name server answer a DNS query differently
|
||
depending on who is asking. It is particularly useful for implementing
|
||
split DNS setups without having to run multiple servers.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Each <command>view</command> statement defines a view of the
|
||
DNS namespace that will be seen by a subset of clients. A client matches
|
||
a view if its source IP address matches the
|
||
<varname>address_match_list</varname> of the view's
|
||
<command>match-clients</command> clause and its destination IP address matches
|
||
the <varname>address_match_list</varname> of the view's
|
||
<command>match-destinations</command> clause. If not specified, both
|
||
<command>match-clients</command> and <command>match-destinations</command>
|
||
default to matching all addresses. In addition to checking IP addresses
|
||
<command>match-clients</command> and <command>match-destinations</command>
|
||
can also take <command>keys</command> which provide an mechanism for the
|
||
client to select the view. A view can also be specified
|
||
as <command>match-recursive-only</command>, which means that only recursive
|
||
requests from matching clients will match that view.
|
||
The order of the <command>view</command> statements is significant —
|
||
a client request will be resolved in the context of the first
|
||
<command>view</command> that it matches.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Zones defined within a <command>view</command> statement will
|
||
be only be accessible to clients that match the <command>view</command>.
|
||
By defining a zone of the same name in multiple views, different
|
||
zone data can be given to different clients, for example, "internal"
|
||
and "external" clients in a split DNS setup.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Many of the options given in the <command>options</command> statement
|
||
can also be used within a <command>view</command> statement, and then
|
||
apply only when resolving queries with that view. When no view-specific
|
||
value is given, the value in the <command>options</command> statement
|
||
is used as a default. Also, zone options can have default values specified
|
||
in the <command>view</command> statement; these view-specific defaults
|
||
take precedence over those in the <command>options</command> statement.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Views are class specific. If no class is given, class IN
|
||
is assumed. Note that all non-IN views must contain a hint zone,
|
||
since only the IN class has compiled-in default hints.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>If there are no <command>view</command> statements in the config
|
||
file, a default view that matches any client is automatically created
|
||
in class IN. Any <command>zone</command> statements specified on
|
||
the top level of the configuration file are considered to be part of
|
||
this default view, and the <command>options</command> statement will
|
||
apply to the default view. If any explicit <command>view</command>
|
||
statements are present, all <command>zone</command> statements must
|
||
occur inside <command>view</command> statements.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Here is an example of a typical split DNS setup implemented
|
||
using <command>view</command> statements.</para>
|
||
<programlisting>view "internal" {
|
||
// This should match our internal networks.
|
||
match-clients { 10.0.0.0/8; };
|
||
|
||
// Provide recursive service to internal clients only.
|
||
recursion yes;
|
||
|
||
// Provide a complete view of the example.com zone
|
||
// including addresses of internal hosts.
|
||
zone "example.com" {
|
||
type master;
|
||
file "example-internal.db";
|
||
};
|
||
};
|
||
|
||
view "external" {
|
||
// Match all clients not matched by the previous view.
|
||
match-clients { any; };
|
||
|
||
// Refuse recursive service to external clients.
|
||
recursion no;
|
||
|
||
// Provide a restricted view of the example.com zone
|
||
// containing only publicly accessible hosts.
|
||
zone "example.com" {
|
||
type master;
|
||
file "example-external.db";
|
||
};
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2 id="zone_statement_grammar"><title><command>zone</command>
|
||
Statement Grammar</title>
|
||
<programlisting>zone <replaceable>zone_name</replaceable> <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> <optional>{
|
||
type ( master | slave | hint | stub | forward | delegation-only ) ;
|
||
<optional> allow-notify { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> } ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-query { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> } ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-transfer { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> } ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-update { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> } ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> update-policy { <replaceable>update_policy_rule</replaceable> <optional>...</optional> } ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> allow-update-forwarding { <replaceable>address_match_list</replaceable> } ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> also-notify { <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> check-names (<constant>warn</constant>|<constant>fail</constant>|<constant>ignore</constant>) ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> dialup <replaceable>dialup_option</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> delegation-only <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> file <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> forward (<constant>only</constant>|<constant>first</constant>) ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> forwarders { <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; <optional> <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; ... </optional> }; </optional>
|
||
<optional> ixfr-base <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> ixfr-tmp-file <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> maintain-ixfr-base <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> masters <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> { ( <replaceable>masters_list</replaceable> | <replaceable>ip_addr</replaceable> <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> <optional>key <replaceable>key</replaceable></optional> ) ; <optional>...</optional> } ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-ixfr-log-size <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-transfer-idle-in <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-transfer-idle-out <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-transfer-time-in <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-transfer-time-out <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> notify <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> | <replaceable>explicit</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> pubkey <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>number</replaceable> <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> alt-transfer-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> alt-transfer-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> use-alt-transfer-source <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
<optional> notify-source (<replaceable>ip4_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> notify-source-v6 (<replaceable>ip6_addr</replaceable> | <constant>*</constant>) <optional>port <replaceable>ip_port</replaceable></optional> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> zone-statistics <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> sig-validity-interval <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> database <replaceable>string</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> min-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-refresh-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> min-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> max-retry-time <replaceable>number</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> multi-master <replaceable>yes_or_no</replaceable> ; </optional>
|
||
<optional> key-directory <replaceable>path_name</replaceable>; </optional>
|
||
|
||
}</optional>;
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2><title><command>zone</command> Statement Definition and Usage</title>
|
||
<sect3><title>Zone Types</title>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0">
|
||
<tgroup cols = "2" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"
|
||
tgroupstyle = "3Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.908in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "4.217in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>master</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The server has a master copy of the data
|
||
for the zone and will be able to provide authoritative answers for
|
||
it.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>slave</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A slave zone is a replica of a master
|
||
zone. The <command>masters</command> list specifies one or more IP addresses
|
||
of master servers that the slave contacts to update its copy of the zone.
|
||
Masters list elements can also be names of other masters lists.
|
||
By default, transfers are made from port 53 on the servers; this can
|
||
be changed for all servers by specifying a port number before the
|
||
list of IP addresses, or on a per-server basis after the IP address.
|
||
Authentication to the master can also be done with per-server TSIG keys.
|
||
If a file is specified, then the
|
||
replica will be written to this file whenever the zone is changed,
|
||
and reloaded from this file on a server restart. Use of a file is
|
||
recommended, since it often speeds server start-up and eliminates
|
||
a needless waste of bandwidth. Note that for large numbers (in the
|
||
tens or hundreds of thousands) of zones per server, it is best to
|
||
use a two level naming scheme for zone file names. For example,
|
||
a slave server for the zone <literal>example.com</literal> might place
|
||
the zone contents into a file called
|
||
<filename>ex/example.com</filename> where <filename>ex/</filename> is
|
||
just the first two letters of the zone name. (Most operating systems
|
||
behave very slowly if you put 100 000 files into
|
||
a single directory.)</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>stub</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A stub zone is similar to a slave zone,
|
||
except that it replicates only the NS records of a master zone instead
|
||
of the entire zone. Stub zones are not a standard part of the DNS;
|
||
they are a feature specific to the <acronym>BIND</acronym> implementation.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Stub zones can be used to eliminate the need for glue NS record
|
||
in a parent zone at the expense of maintaining a stub zone entry and
|
||
a set of name server addresses in <filename>named.conf</filename>.
|
||
This usage is not recommended for new configurations, and BIND 9
|
||
supports it only in a limited way.
|
||
In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 4/8, zone transfers of a parent zone
|
||
included the NS records from stub children of that zone. This meant
|
||
that, in some cases, users could get away with configuring child stubs
|
||
only in the master server for the parent zone. <acronym>BIND</acronym>
|
||
9 never mixes together zone data from different zones in this
|
||
way. Therefore, if a <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 master serving a parent
|
||
zone has child stub zones configured, all the slave servers for the
|
||
parent zone also need to have the same child stub zones
|
||
configured.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Stub zones can also be used as a way of forcing the resolution
|
||
of a given domain to use a particular set of authoritative servers.
|
||
For example, the caching name servers on a private network using
|
||
RFC1981 addressing may be configured with stub zones for
|
||
<literal>10.in-addr.arpa</literal>
|
||
to use a set of internal name servers as the authoritative
|
||
servers for that domain.</para>
|
||
</entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>forward</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>A "forward zone" is a way to configure
|
||
forwarding on a per-domain basis. A <command>zone</command> statement
|
||
of type <command>forward</command> can contain a <command>forward</command> and/or <command>forwarders</command> statement,
|
||
which will apply to queries within the domain given by the zone
|
||
name. If no <command>forwarders</command> statement is present or
|
||
an empty list for <command>forwarders</command> is given, then no
|
||
forwarding will be done for the domain, canceling the effects of
|
||
any forwarders in the <command>options</command> statement. Thus
|
||
if you want to use this type of zone to change the behavior of the
|
||
global <command>forward</command> option (that is, "forward first
|
||
to", then "forward only", or vice versa, but want to use the same
|
||
servers as set globally) you need to re-specify the global forwarders.</para>
|
||
</entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>hint</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The initial set of root name servers is
|
||
specified using a "hint zone". When the server starts up, it uses
|
||
the root hints to find a root name server and get the most recent
|
||
list of root name servers. If no hint zone is specified for class
|
||
IN, the server uses a compiled-in default set of root servers hints.
|
||
Classes other than IN have no built-in defaults hints.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>delegation-only</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>This is used to enforce the delegation only
|
||
status of infrastructure zones (e.g. COM, NET, ORG). Any answer that
|
||
is received without a explicit or implicit delegation in the authority
|
||
section will be treated as NXDOMAIN. This does not apply to the zone
|
||
apex. This SHOULD NOT be applied to leaf zones.</para>
|
||
<para><varname>delegation-only</varname> has no effect on answers received
|
||
from forwarders.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable></sect3>
|
||
|
||
<sect3><title>Class</title>
|
||
<para>The zone's name may optionally be followed by a class. If
|
||
a class is not specified, class <literal>IN</literal> (for <varname>Internet</varname>),
|
||
is assumed. This is correct for the vast majority of cases.</para>
|
||
<para>The <literal>hesiod</literal> class is
|
||
named for an information service from MIT's Project Athena. It is
|
||
used to share information about various systems databases, such
|
||
as users, groups, printers and so on. The keyword
|
||
<literal>HS</literal> is
|
||
a synonym for hesiod.</para>
|
||
<para>Another MIT development is CHAOSnet, a LAN protocol created
|
||
in the mid-1970s. Zone data for it can be specified with the <literal>CHAOS</literal> class.</para></sect3>
|
||
<sect3>
|
||
|
||
<title>Zone Options</title>
|
||
|
||
<variablelist>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-notify</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>allow-notify</command> in <xref linkend="access_control"/></para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-query</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>allow-query</command> in <xref linkend="access_control"/></para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-transfer</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of <command>allow-transfer</command>
|
||
in <xref linkend="access_control"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-update</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies which hosts are allowed to
|
||
submit Dynamic DNS updates for master zones. The default is to deny
|
||
updates from all hosts. Note that allowing updates based
|
||
on the requestor's IP address is insecure; see
|
||
<xref linkend="dynamic_update_security"/> for details.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>update-policy</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specifies a "Simple Secure Update" policy. See
|
||
<xref linkend="dynamic_update_policies"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>allow-update-forwarding</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of <command>allow-update-forwarding</command>
|
||
in <xref linkend="access_control"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>also-notify</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Only meaningful if <command>notify</command> is
|
||
active for this zone. The set of machines that will receive a
|
||
<literal>DNS NOTIFY</literal> message
|
||
for this zone is made up of all the listed name servers (other than
|
||
the primary master) for the zone plus any IP addresses specified
|
||
with <command>also-notify</command>. A port may be specified
|
||
with each <command>also-notify</command> address to send the notify
|
||
messages to a port other than the default of 53.
|
||
<command>also-notify</command> is not meaningful for stub zones.
|
||
The default is the empty list.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>check-names</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
This option is used to restrict the character set and syntax of
|
||
certain domain names in master files and/or DNS responses received from the
|
||
network.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>database</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Specify the type of database to be used for storing the
|
||
zone data. The string following the <command>database</command> keyword
|
||
is interpreted as a list of whitespace-delimited words. The first word
|
||
identifies the database type, and any subsequent words are passed
|
||
as arguments to the database to be interpreted in a way specific
|
||
to the database type.</para>
|
||
<para>The default is <userinput>"rbt"</userinput>, BIND 9's native in-memory
|
||
red-black-tree database. This database does not take arguments.</para>
|
||
<para>Other values are possible if additional database drivers
|
||
have been linked into the server. Some sample drivers are included
|
||
with the distribution but none are linked in by default.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>dialup</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>dialup</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>delegation-only</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>The flag only applies to hint and stub zones. If set
|
||
to <userinput>yes</userinput> then the zone will also be treated as if it
|
||
is also a delegation-only type zone.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>forward</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Only meaningful if the zone has a forwarders
|
||
list. The <command>only</command> value causes the lookup to fail
|
||
after trying the forwarders and getting no answer, while <command>first</command> would
|
||
allow a normal lookup to be tried.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>forwarders</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Used to override the list of global forwarders.
|
||
If it is not specified in a zone of type <command>forward</command>,
|
||
no forwarding is done for the zone; the global options are not used.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>ixfr-base</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Was used in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8 to specify the name
|
||
of the transaction log (journal) file for dynamic update and IXFR.
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 ignores the option and constructs the name of the journal
|
||
file by appending "<filename>.jnl</filename>" to the name of the
|
||
zone file.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>ixfr-tmp-file</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>Was an undocumented option in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8.
|
||
Ignored in <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-transfer-time-in</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>max-transfer-time-in</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-transfer-idle-in</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>max-transfer-idle-in</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-transfer-time-out</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>max-transfer-time-out</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>max-transfer-idle-out</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>max-transfer-idle-out</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>notify</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>notify</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>pubkey</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>In <acronym>BIND</acronym> 8, this option was intended for specifying
|
||
a public zone key for verification of signatures in DNSSEC signed
|
||
zones when they are loaded from disk. <acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 does not verify signatures
|
||
on load and ignores the option.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>zone-statistics</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>If <userinput>yes</userinput>, the server will keep statistical
|
||
information for this zone, which can be dumped to the
|
||
<command>statistics-file</command> defined in the server options.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>sig-validity-interval</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>sig-validity-interval</command> in <xref linkend="tuning"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>transfer-source</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>transfer-source</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>transfer-source-v6</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>transfer-source-v6</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>alt-transfer-source</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>alt-transfer-source</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>alt-transfer-source-v6</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>alt-transfer-source-v6</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>use-alt-transfer-source</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>use-alt-transfer-source</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>notify-source</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>notify-source</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>notify-source-v6</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>notify-source-v6</command> in <xref linkend="zone_transfers"/>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry>
|
||
<term><command>min-refresh-time</command></term>
|
||
<term><command>max-refresh-time</command></term>
|
||
<term><command>min-retry-time</command></term>
|
||
<term><command>max-retry-time</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>
|
||
See the description in <xref linkend="tuning"/>.
|
||
</para></listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>ixfr-from-differences</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>ixfr-from-differences</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>key-directory</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>key-directory</command> in <xref linkend="options"/></para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
<varlistentry><term><command>multi-master</command></term>
|
||
<listitem><para>See the description of
|
||
<command>multi-master</command> in <xref linkend="boolean_options"/>.</para>
|
||
</listitem></varlistentry>
|
||
|
||
</variablelist>
|
||
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
<sect3 id="dynamic_update_policies"><title>Dynamic Update Policies</title>
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 supports two alternative methods of granting clients
|
||
the right to perform dynamic updates to a zone,
|
||
configured by the <command>allow-update</command> and
|
||
<command>update-policy</command> option, respectively.</para>
|
||
<para>The <command>allow-update</command> clause works the same
|
||
way as in previous versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym>. It grants given clients the
|
||
permission to update any record of any name in the zone.</para>
|
||
<para>The <command>update-policy</command> clause is new in <acronym>BIND</acronym>
|
||
9 and allows more fine-grained control over what updates are allowed.
|
||
A set of rules is specified, where each rule either grants or denies
|
||
permissions for one or more names to be updated by one or more identities.
|
||
If the dynamic update request message is signed (that is, it includes
|
||
either a TSIG or SIG(0) record), the identity of the signer can
|
||
be determined.</para>
|
||
<para>Rules are specified in the <command>update-policy</command> zone
|
||
option, and are only meaningful for master zones. When the <command>update-policy</command> statement
|
||
is present, it is a configuration error for the <command>allow-update</command> statement
|
||
to be present. The <command>update-policy</command> statement only
|
||
examines the signer of a message; the source address is not relevant.</para>
|
||
<para>This is how a rule definition looks:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
( <command>grant</command> | <command>deny</command> ) <replaceable>identity</replaceable> <replaceable>nametype</replaceable> <replaceable>name</replaceable> <optional> <replaceable>types</replaceable> </optional>
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>Each rule grants or denies privileges. Once a message has
|
||
successfully matched a rule, the operation is immediately granted
|
||
or denied and no further rules are examined. A rule is matched
|
||
when the signer matches the identity field, the name matches the
|
||
name field in accordance with the nametype field, and the type matches
|
||
the types specified in the type field.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The identity field specifies a name or a wildcard name. Normally, this
|
||
is the name of the TSIG or SIG(0) key used to sign the update request. When a
|
||
TKEY exchange has been used to create a shared secret, the identity of the
|
||
shared secret is the same as the identity of the key used to authenticate the
|
||
TKEY exchange. When the <replaceable>identity</replaceable> field specifies a
|
||
wildcard name, it is subject to DNS wildcard expansion, so the rule will apply
|
||
to multiple identities. The <replaceable>identity</replaceable> field must
|
||
contain a fully qualified domain name.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The <replaceable>nametype</replaceable> field has 4 values:
|
||
<varname>name</varname>, <varname>subdomain</varname>,
|
||
<varname>wildcard</varname>, and <varname>self</varname>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
<informaltable>
|
||
<tgroup cols = "2" colsep = "0"
|
||
rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.819in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.681in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>name</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Exact-match semantics. This rule matches when the
|
||
name being updated is identical to the contents of the
|
||
<replaceable>name</replaceable> field.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>subdomain</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>This rule matches when the name being updated
|
||
is a subdomain of, or identical to, the contents of the
|
||
<replaceable>name</replaceable> field.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>wildcard</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The <replaceable>name</replaceable> field is
|
||
subject to DNS wildcard expansion, and this rule matches when the name
|
||
being updated name is a valid expansion of the wildcard.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><varname>self</varname></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>This rule matches when the name being updated
|
||
matches the contents of the <replaceable>identity</replaceable> field.
|
||
The <replaceable>name</replaceable> field is ignored, but should be
|
||
the same as the <replaceable>identity</replaceable> field. The
|
||
<varname>self</varname> nametype is most useful when allowing using
|
||
one key per name to update, where the key has the same name as the name
|
||
to be updated. The <replaceable>identity</replaceable> would be
|
||
specified as <constant>*</constant> in this case.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
|
||
<para>In all cases, the <replaceable>name</replaceable> field must
|
||
specify a fully qualified domain name.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>If no types are explicitly specified, this rule matches all types except
|
||
SIG, NS, SOA, and NXT. Types may be specified by name, including
|
||
"ANY" (ANY matches all types except NXT, which can never be updated).
|
||
Note that when an attempt is made to delete all records associated with a
|
||
name, the rules are checked for each existing record type.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>Zone File</title>
|
||
<sect2 id="types_of_resource_records_and_when_to_use_them">
|
||
<title>Types of Resource Records and When to Use Them</title>
|
||
<para>This section, largely borrowed from RFC 1034, describes the
|
||
concept of a Resource Record (RR) and explains when each is used.
|
||
Since the publication of RFC 1034, several new RRs have been identified
|
||
and implemented in the DNS. These are also included.</para>
|
||
<sect3>
|
||
<title>Resource Records</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>A domain name identifies a node. Each node has a set of
|
||
resource information, which may be empty. The set of resource
|
||
information associated with a particular name is composed of
|
||
separate RRs. The order of RRs in a set is not significant and
|
||
need not be preserved by name servers, resolvers, or other
|
||
parts of the DNS. However, sorting of multiple RRs is
|
||
permitted for optimization purposes, for example, to specify
|
||
that a particular nearby server be tried first. See <xref
|
||
linkend="the_sortlist_statement"/> and <xref
|
||
linkend="rrset_ordering"/>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The components of a Resource Record are:</para>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0"
|
||
rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "2" colsep = "0"
|
||
rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.000in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.500in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>owner name</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>the domain name where the RR is found.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>type</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>an encoded 16 bit value that specifies
|
||
the type of the resource record.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>TTL</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>the time to live of the RR. This field
|
||
is a 32 bit integer in units of seconds, and is primarily used by
|
||
resolvers when they cache RRs. The TTL describes how long a RR can
|
||
be cached before it should be discarded.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>class</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>an encoded 16 bit value that identifies
|
||
a protocol family or instance of a protocol.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>RDATA</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>the resource data. The format of the
|
||
data is type (and sometimes class) specific.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<para>The following are <emphasis>types</emphasis> of valid RRs:</para>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0"
|
||
rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "2" colsep = "0"
|
||
rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.875in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.625in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>A</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>a host address. In the IN class, this is a
|
||
32-bit IP address. Described in RFC 1035.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>AAAA</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>IPv6 address. Described in RFC 1886.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>A6</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>IPv6 address. This can be a partial
|
||
address (a suffix) and an indirection to the name where the rest of the
|
||
address (the prefix) can be found. Experimental. Described in RFC 2874.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>AFSDB</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>location of AFS database servers.
|
||
Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>APL</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>address prefix list. Experimental.
|
||
Described in RFC 3123.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>CERT</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>holds a digital certificate.
|
||
Described in RFC 2538.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>CNAME</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>identifies the canonical name of an alias.
|
||
Described in RFC 1035.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>DNAME</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Replaces the domain name specified with
|
||
another name to be looked up, effectively aliasing an entire
|
||
subtree of the domain name space rather than a single record
|
||
as in the case of the CNAME RR.
|
||
Described in RFC 2672.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>GPOS</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Specifies the global position. Superseded by LOC.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>HINFO</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>identifies the CPU and OS used by a host.
|
||
Described in RFC 1035.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>ISDN</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>representation of ISDN addresses.
|
||
Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>KEY</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>stores a public key associated with a
|
||
DNS name. Described in RFC 2535.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>KX</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>identifies a key exchanger for this
|
||
DNS name. Described in RFC 2230.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>LOC</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>for storing GPS info. Described in RFC 1876.
|
||
Experimental.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>MX</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>identifies a mail exchange for the domain.
|
||
a 16 bit preference value (lower is better)
|
||
followed by the host name of the mail exchange.
|
||
Described in RFC 974, RFC 1035.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>NAPTR</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>name authority pointer. Described in RFC 2915.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>NSAP</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>a network service access point.
|
||
Described in RFC 1706.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>NS</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>the authoritative name server for the
|
||
domain. Described in RFC 1035.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>NXT</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>used in DNSSEC to securely indicate that
|
||
RRs with an owner name in a certain name interval do not exist in
|
||
a zone and indicate what RR types are present for an existing name.
|
||
Described in RFC 2535.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>PTR</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>a pointer to another part of the domain
|
||
name space. Described in RFC 1035.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>PX</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>provides mappings between RFC 822 and X.400
|
||
addresses. Described in RFC 2163.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>RP</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>information on persons responsible
|
||
for the domain. Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>RT</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>route-through binding for hosts that
|
||
do not have their own direct wide area network addresses.
|
||
Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>SIG</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>("signature") contains data authenticated
|
||
in the secure DNS. Described in RFC 2535.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>SOA</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>identifies the start of a zone of authority.
|
||
Described in RFC 1035.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>SRV</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>information about well known network
|
||
services (replaces WKS). Described in RFC 2782.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>TXT</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>text records. Described in RFC 1035.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>WKS</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>information about which well known
|
||
network services, such as SMTP, that a domain supports. Historical.
|
||
</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>X25</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>representation of X.25 network addresses.
|
||
Experimental. Described in RFC 1183.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<para>The following <emphasis>classes</emphasis> of resource records
|
||
are currently valid in the DNS:</para><informaltable colsep = "0"
|
||
rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "2" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"
|
||
tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.875in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.625in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>IN</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The Internet.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>CH</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>
|
||
CHAOSnet, a LAN protocol created at MIT in the mid-1970s.
|
||
Rarely used for its historical purpose, but reused for BIND's
|
||
built-in server information zones, e.g.,
|
||
<literal>version.bind</literal>.
|
||
</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>HS</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>
|
||
Hesiod, an information service
|
||
developed by MIT's Project Athena. It is used to share information
|
||
about various systems databases, such as users, groups, printers
|
||
and so on.
|
||
</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
|
||
<para>The owner name is often implicit, rather than forming an integral
|
||
part of the RR. For example, many name servers internally form tree
|
||
or hash structures for the name space, and chain RRs off nodes.
|
||
The remaining RR parts are the fixed header (type, class, TTL)
|
||
which is consistent for all RRs, and a variable part (RDATA) that
|
||
fits the needs of the resource being described.</para>
|
||
<para>The meaning of the TTL field is a time limit on how long an
|
||
RR can be kept in a cache. This limit does not apply to authoritative
|
||
data in zones; it is also timed out, but by the refreshing policies
|
||
for the zone. The TTL is assigned by the administrator for the
|
||
zone where the data originates. While short TTLs can be used to
|
||
minimize caching, and a zero TTL prohibits caching, the realities
|
||
of Internet performance suggest that these times should be on the
|
||
order of days for the typical host. If a change can be anticipated,
|
||
the TTL can be reduced prior to the change to minimize inconsistency
|
||
during the change, and then increased back to its former value following
|
||
the change.</para>
|
||
<para>The data in the RDATA section of RRs is carried as a combination
|
||
of binary strings and domain names. The domain names are frequently
|
||
used as "pointers" to other data in the DNS.</para></sect3>
|
||
<sect3><title>Textual expression of RRs</title>
|
||
<para>RRs are represented in binary form in the packets of the DNS
|
||
protocol, and are usually represented in highly encoded form when
|
||
stored in a name server or resolver. In the examples provided in
|
||
RFC 1034, a style similar to that used in master files was employed
|
||
in order to show the contents of RRs. In this format, most RRs
|
||
are shown on a single line, although continuation lines are possible
|
||
using parentheses.</para>
|
||
<para>The start of the line gives the owner of the RR. If a line
|
||
begins with a blank, then the owner is assumed to be the same as
|
||
that of the previous RR. Blank lines are often included for readability.</para>
|
||
<para>Following the owner, we list the TTL, type, and class of the
|
||
RR. Class and type use the mnemonics defined above, and TTL is
|
||
an integer before the type field. In order to avoid ambiguity in
|
||
parsing, type and class mnemonics are disjoint, TTLs are integers,
|
||
and the type mnemonic is always last. The IN class and TTL values
|
||
are often omitted from examples in the interests of clarity.</para>
|
||
<para>The resource data or RDATA section of the RR are given using
|
||
knowledge of the typical representation for the data.</para>
|
||
<para>For example, we might show the RRs carried in a message as:</para> <informaltable
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "3"
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.381in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.020in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "3" colnum = "3" colsep = "0" colwidth = "2.099in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>ISI.EDU.</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>MX</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>10 VENERA.ISI.EDU.</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>MX</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>10 VAXA.ISI.EDU</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>VENERA.ISI.EDU</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>128.9.0.32</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>10.1.0.52</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>VAXA.ISI.EDU</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>10.2.0.27</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>128.9.0.33</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<para>The MX RRs have an RDATA section which consists of a 16 bit
|
||
number followed by a domain name. The address RRs use a standard
|
||
IP address format to contain a 32 bit internet address.</para>
|
||
<para>This example shows six RRs, with two RRs at each of three
|
||
domain names.</para>
|
||
<para>Similarly we might see:</para><informaltable colsep = "0"
|
||
rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "3" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"
|
||
tgroupstyle = "4Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.491in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.067in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "3" colnum = "3" colsep = "0" colwidth = "2.067in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>XX.LCS.MIT.EDU. IN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>10.0.0.44</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>CH</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>MIT.EDU. 2420</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<para>This example shows two addresses for <literal>XX.LCS.MIT.EDU</literal>,
|
||
each of a different class.</para></sect3></sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title>Discussion of MX Records</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>As described above, domain servers store information as a
|
||
series of resource records, each of which contains a particular
|
||
piece of information about a given domain name (which is usually,
|
||
but not always, a host). The simplest way to think of a RR is as
|
||
a typed pair of data, a domain name matched with a relevant datum,
|
||
and stored with some additional type information to help systems
|
||
determine when the RR is relevant.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>MX records are used to control delivery of email. The data
|
||
specified in the record is a priority and a domain name. The priority
|
||
controls the order in which email delivery is attempted, with the
|
||
lowest number first. If two priorities are the same, a server is
|
||
chosen randomly. If no servers at a given priority are responding,
|
||
the mail transport agent will fall back to the next largest priority.
|
||
Priority numbers do not have any absolute meaning — they are relevant
|
||
only respective to other MX records for that domain name. The domain
|
||
name given is the machine to which the mail will be delivered. It <emphasis>must</emphasis> have
|
||
an associated A record — CNAME is not sufficient.</para>
|
||
<para>For a given domain, if there is both a CNAME record and an
|
||
MX record, the MX record is in error, and will be ignored. Instead,
|
||
the mail will be delivered to the server specified in the MX record
|
||
pointed to by the CNAME.</para>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "5"
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "3Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.708in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.444in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "3" colnum = "3" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.444in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "4" colnum = "4" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.976in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "5" colnum = "5" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.553in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>example.com.</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>IN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>MX</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para><literal>10</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para><literal>mail.example.com.</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>IN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>MX</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para><literal>10</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para><literal>mail2.example.com.</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>IN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>MX</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para><literal>20</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para><literal>mail.backup.org.</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>mail.example.com.</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>IN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para><literal>10.0.0.1</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>mail2.example.com.</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>IN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para><literal>A</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para><literal>10.0.0.2</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable><para>For example:</para>
|
||
<para>Mail delivery will be attempted to <literal>mail.example.com</literal> and
|
||
<literal>mail2.example.com</literal> (in
|
||
any order), and if neither of those succeed, delivery to <literal>mail.backup.org</literal> will
|
||
be attempted.</para></sect2>
|
||
<sect2 id="Setting_TTLs"><title>Setting TTLs</title>
|
||
<para>The time to live of the RR field is a 32 bit integer represented
|
||
in units of seconds, and is primarily used by resolvers when they
|
||
cache RRs. The TTL describes how long a RR can be cached before it
|
||
should be discarded. The following three types of TTL are currently
|
||
used in a zone file.</para>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "2"
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "3Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.750in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "4.375in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>SOA</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The last field in the SOA is the negative
|
||
caching TTL. This controls how long other servers will cache no-such-domain
|
||
(NXDOMAIN) responses from you.</para><para>The maximum time for
|
||
negative caching is 3 hours (3h).</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>$TTL</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>The $TTL directive at the top of the
|
||
zone file (before the SOA) gives a default TTL for every RR without
|
||
a specific TTL set.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>RR TTLs</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>Each RR can have a TTL as the second
|
||
field in the RR, which will control how long other servers can cache
|
||
the it.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<para>All of these TTLs default to units of seconds, though units
|
||
can be explicitly specified, for example, <literal>1h30m</literal>. </para></sect2>
|
||
<sect2><title>Inverse Mapping in IPv4</title>
|
||
<para>Reverse name resolution (that is, translation from IP address
|
||
to name) is achieved by means of the <emphasis>in-addr.arpa</emphasis> domain
|
||
and PTR records. Entries in the in-addr.arpa domain are made in
|
||
least-to-most significant order, read left to right. This is the
|
||
opposite order to the way IP addresses are usually written. Thus,
|
||
a machine with an IP address of 10.1.2.3 would have a corresponding
|
||
in-addr.arpa name of
|
||
3.2.1.10.in-addr.arpa. This name should have a PTR resource record
|
||
whose data field is the name of the machine or, optionally, multiple
|
||
PTR records if the machine has more than one name. For example,
|
||
in the <optional>example.com</optional> domain:</para>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0">
|
||
<tgroup cols = "2" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"
|
||
tgroupstyle = "3Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.125in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "4.000in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>$ORIGIN</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>2.1.10.in-addr.arpa</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><literal>3</literal></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><literal>IN PTR foo.example.com.</literal></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<note>
|
||
<para>The <command>$ORIGIN</command> lines in the examples
|
||
are for providing context to the examples only-they do not necessarily
|
||
appear in the actual usage. They are only used here to indicate
|
||
that the example is relative to the listed origin.</para></note></sect2>
|
||
<sect2><title>Other Zone File Directives</title>
|
||
<para>The Master File Format was initially defined in RFC 1035 and
|
||
has subsequently been extended. While the Master File Format itself
|
||
is class independent all records in a Master File must be of the same
|
||
class.</para>
|
||
<para>Master File Directives include <command>$ORIGIN</command>, <command>$INCLUDE</command>,
|
||
and <command>$TTL.</command></para>
|
||
<sect3><title>The <command>$ORIGIN</command> Directive</title>
|
||
<para>Syntax: <command>$ORIGIN
|
||
</command><replaceable>domain-name</replaceable> <optional> <replaceable>comment</replaceable></optional></para>
|
||
<para><command>$ORIGIN</command> sets the domain name that will
|
||
be appended to any unqualified records. When a zone is first read
|
||
in there is an implicit <command>$ORIGIN</command> <<varname>zone-name</varname>><command>.</command> The
|
||
current <command>$ORIGIN</command> is appended to the domain specified
|
||
in the <command>$ORIGIN</command> argument if it is not absolute.</para>
|
||
<programlisting><literal>$ORIGIN example.com.
|
||
WWW CNAME MAIN-SERVER</literal></programlisting>
|
||
<para>is equivalent to</para>
|
||
<programlisting><literal>WWW.EXAMPLE.COM. CNAME MAIN-SERVER.EXAMPLE.COM.</literal></programlisting></sect3>
|
||
<sect3><title>The <command>$INCLUDE</command> Directive</title>
|
||
<para>Syntax: <command>$INCLUDE</command>
|
||
<replaceable>filename</replaceable> <optional>
|
||
<replaceable>origin</replaceable> </optional> <optional> <replaceable>comment</replaceable> </optional></para>
|
||
<para>Read and process the file <filename>filename</filename> as
|
||
if it were included into the file at this point. If <command>origin</command> is
|
||
specified the file is processed with <command>$ORIGIN</command> set
|
||
to that value, otherwise the current <command>$ORIGIN</command> is
|
||
used.</para>
|
||
<para>The origin and the current domain name
|
||
revert to the values they had prior to the <command>$INCLUDE</command> once
|
||
the file has been read.</para>
|
||
<note><para>
|
||
RFC 1035 specifies that the current origin should be restored after
|
||
an <command>$INCLUDE</command>, but it is silent on whether the current
|
||
domain name should also be restored. BIND 9 restores both of them.
|
||
This could be construed as a deviation from RFC 1035, a feature, or both.
|
||
</para></note>
|
||
</sect3>
|
||
<sect3><title>The <command>$TTL</command> Directive</title>
|
||
<para>Syntax: <command>$TTL</command>
|
||
<replaceable>default-ttl</replaceable> <optional>
|
||
<replaceable>comment</replaceable> </optional></para>
|
||
<para>Set the default Time To Live (TTL) for subsequent records
|
||
with undefined TTLs. Valid TTLs are of the range 0-2147483647 seconds.</para>
|
||
<para><command>$TTL</command> is defined in RFC 2308.</para></sect3></sect2>
|
||
<sect2><title><acronym>BIND</acronym> Master File Extension: the <command>$GENERATE</command> Directive</title>
|
||
<para>Syntax: <command>$GENERATE</command> <replaceable>range</replaceable> <replaceable>lhs</replaceable> <optional><replaceable>ttl</replaceable></optional> <optional><replaceable>class</replaceable></optional> <replaceable>type</replaceable> <replaceable>rhs</replaceable> <optional> <replaceable>comment</replaceable> </optional></para>
|
||
<para><command>$GENERATE</command> is used to create a series of
|
||
resource records that only differ from each other by an iterator. <command>$GENERATE</command> can
|
||
be used to easily generate the sets of records required to support
|
||
sub /24 reverse delegations described in RFC 2317: Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA
|
||
delegation.</para>
|
||
<programlisting><literal>$ORIGIN 0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
|
||
$GENERATE 1-2 0 NS SERVER$.EXAMPLE.
|
||
$GENERATE 1-127 $ CNAME $.0</literal></programlisting>
|
||
<para>is equivalent to</para>
|
||
<programlisting><literal>0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA NS SERVER1.EXAMPLE.
|
||
0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. NS SERVER2.EXAMPLE.
|
||
1.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 1.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
|
||
2.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 2.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
|
||
...
|
||
127.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA. CNAME 127.0.0.0.192.IN-ADDR.ARPA.
|
||
</literal></programlisting>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0">
|
||
<tgroup cols = "2" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "3Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.875in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "4.250in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>range</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>This can be one of two forms: start-stop
|
||
or start-stop/step. If the first form is used then step is set to
|
||
1. All of start, stop and step must be positive.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>lhs</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><command>lhs</command> describes the
|
||
owner name of the resource records to be created. Any single <command>$</command> symbols
|
||
within the <command>lhs</command> side are replaced by the iterator
|
||
value.
|
||
To get a $ in the output you need to escape the <command>$</command>
|
||
using a backslash <command>\</command>,
|
||
e.g. <command>\$</command>. The <command>$</command> may optionally be followed
|
||
by modifiers which change the offset from the iterator, field width and base.
|
||
Modifiers are introduced by a <command>{</command> immediately following the
|
||
<command>$</command> as <command>${offset[,width[,base]]}</command>.
|
||
e.g. <command>${-20,3,d}</command> which subtracts 20 from the current value,
|
||
prints the result as a decimal in a zero padded field of with 3. Available
|
||
output forms are decimal (<command>d</command>), octal (<command>o</command>)
|
||
and hexadecimal (<command>x</command> or <command>X</command> for uppercase).
|
||
The default modifier is <command>${0,0,d}</command>.
|
||
If the <command>lhs</command> is not
|
||
absolute, the current <command>$ORIGIN</command> is appended to
|
||
the name.</para>
|
||
<para>For compatibility with earlier versions <command>$$</command> is still
|
||
recognized a indicating a literal $ in the output.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>ttl</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><command>ttl</command> specifies the
|
||
ttl of the generated records. If not specified this will be
|
||
inherited using the normal ttl inheritance rules.</para>
|
||
<para><command>class</command> and <command>ttl</command> can be
|
||
entered in either order.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>class</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para><command>class</command> specifies the
|
||
class of the generated records. This must match the zone class if
|
||
it is specified.</para>
|
||
<para><command>class</command> and <command>ttl</command> can be
|
||
entered in either order.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>type</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>At present the only supported types are
|
||
PTR, CNAME, DNAME, A, AAAA and NS.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para><command>rhs</command></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>rhs is a domain name. It is processed
|
||
similarly to lhs.</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<para>The <command>$GENERATE</command> directive is a <acronym>BIND</acronym> extension
|
||
and not part of the standard zone file format.</para>
|
||
<para>BIND 8 does not support the optional TTL and CLASS fields.</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
</chapter>
|
||
<chapter id="ch07"><title><acronym>BIND</acronym> 9 Security Considerations</title>
|
||
<sect1 id="Access_Control_Lists"><title>Access Control Lists</title>
|
||
<para>Access Control Lists (ACLs), are address match lists that
|
||
you can set up and nickname for future use in <command>allow-notify</command>,
|
||
<command>allow-query</command>, <command>allow-recursion</command>,
|
||
<command>blackhole</command>, <command>allow-transfer</command>,
|
||
etc.</para>
|
||
<para>Using ACLs allows you to have finer control over who can access
|
||
your name server, without cluttering up your config files with huge
|
||
lists of IP addresses.</para>
|
||
<para>It is a <emphasis>good idea</emphasis> to use ACLs, and to
|
||
control access to your server. Limiting access to your server by
|
||
outside parties can help prevent spoofing and DoS attacks against
|
||
your server.</para>
|
||
<para>Here is an example of how to properly apply ACLs:</para>
|
||
<programlisting>
|
||
// Set up an ACL named "bogusnets" that will block RFC1918 space,
|
||
// which is commonly used in spoofing attacks.
|
||
acl bogusnets { 0.0.0.0/8; 1.0.0.0/8; 2.0.0.0/8; 192.0.2.0/24; 224.0.0.0/3; 10.0.0.0/8; 172.16.0.0/12; 192.168.0.0/16; };
|
||
// Set up an ACL called our-nets. Replace this with the real IP numbers.
|
||
acl our-nets { x.x.x.x/24; x.x.x.x/21; };
|
||
options {
|
||
...
|
||
...
|
||
allow-query { our-nets; };
|
||
allow-recursion { our-nets; };
|
||
...
|
||
blackhole { bogusnets; };
|
||
...
|
||
};
|
||
zone "example.com" {
|
||
type master;
|
||
file "m/example.com";
|
||
allow-query { any; };
|
||
};
|
||
</programlisting>
|
||
<para>This allows recursive queries of the server from the outside
|
||
unless recursion has been previously disabled.</para>
|
||
<para>For more information on how to use ACLs to protect your server,
|
||
see the <emphasis>AUSCERT</emphasis> advisory at
|
||
<ulink url="ftp://ftp.auscert.org.au/pub/auscert/advisory/AL-1999.004.dns_dos">ftp://ftp.auscert.org.au/pub/auscert/advisory/AL-1999.004.dns_dos</ulink></para></sect1>
|
||
<sect1><title><command>chroot</command> and <command>setuid</command> (for
|
||
UNIX servers)</title>
|
||
<para>On UNIX servers, it is possible to run <acronym>BIND</acronym> in a <emphasis>chrooted</emphasis> environment
|
||
(<command>chroot()</command>) by specifying the "<option>-t</option>"
|
||
option. This can help improve system security by placing <acronym>BIND</acronym> in
|
||
a "sandbox", which will limit the damage done if a server is compromised.</para>
|
||
<para>Another useful feature in the UNIX version of <acronym>BIND</acronym> is the
|
||
ability to run the daemon as an unprivileged user ( <option>-u</option> <replaceable>user</replaceable> ).
|
||
We suggest running as an unprivileged user when using the <command>chroot</command> feature.</para>
|
||
<para>Here is an example command line to load <acronym>BIND</acronym> in a <command>chroot()</command> sandbox,
|
||
<command>/var/named</command>, and to run <command>named</command> <command>setuid</command> to
|
||
user 202:</para>
|
||
<para><userinput>/usr/local/bin/named -u 202 -t /var/named</userinput></para>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title>The <command>chroot</command> Environment</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>In order for a <command>chroot()</command> environment to
|
||
work properly in a particular directory
|
||
(for example, <filename>/var/named</filename>),
|
||
you will need to set up an environment that includes everything
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> needs to run.
|
||
From <acronym>BIND</acronym>'s point of view, <filename>/var/named</filename> is
|
||
the root of the filesystem. You will need to adjust the values of options like
|
||
like <command>directory</command> and <command>pid-file</command> to account
|
||
for this.
|
||
</para>
|
||
<para>
|
||
Unlike with earlier versions of BIND, you will typically
|
||
<emphasis>not</emphasis> need to compile <command>named</command>
|
||
statically nor install shared libraries under the new root.
|
||
However, depending on your operating system, you may need
|
||
to set up things like
|
||
<filename>/dev/zero</filename>,
|
||
<filename>/dev/random</filename>,
|
||
<filename>/dev/log</filename>, and/or
|
||
<filename>/etc/localtime</filename>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
|
||
<sect2><title>Using the <command>setuid</command> Function</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Prior to running the <command>named</command> daemon, use
|
||
the <command>touch</command> utility (to change file access and
|
||
modification times) or the <command>chown</command> utility (to
|
||
set the user id and/or group id) on files
|
||
to which you want <acronym>BIND</acronym>
|
||
to write. Note that if the <command>named</command> daemon is running as an
|
||
unprivileged user, it will not be able to bind to new restricted ports if the
|
||
server is reloaded.</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
|
||
<sect1 id="dynamic_update_security"><title>Dynamic Update Security</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Access to the dynamic
|
||
update facility should be strictly limited. In earlier versions of
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> the only way to do this was based on the IP
|
||
address of the host requesting the update, by listing an IP address or
|
||
network prefix in the <command>allow-update</command> zone option.
|
||
This method is insecure since the source address of the update UDP packet
|
||
is easily forged. Also note that if the IP addresses allowed by the
|
||
<command>allow-update</command> option include the address of a slave
|
||
server which performs forwarding of dynamic updates, the master can be
|
||
trivially attacked by sending the update to the slave, which will
|
||
forward it to the master with its own source IP address causing the
|
||
master to approve it without question.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>For these reasons, we strongly recommend that updates be
|
||
cryptographically authenticated by means of transaction signatures
|
||
(TSIG). That is, the <command>allow-update</command> option should
|
||
list only TSIG key names, not IP addresses or network
|
||
prefixes. Alternatively, the new <command>update-policy</command>
|
||
option can be used.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Some sites choose to keep all dynamically updated DNS data
|
||
in a subdomain and delegate that subdomain to a separate zone. This
|
||
way, the top-level zone containing critical data such as the IP addresses
|
||
of public web and mail servers need not allow dynamic update at
|
||
all.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1></chapter>
|
||
|
||
<chapter id="ch08">
|
||
<title>Troubleshooting</title>
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>Common Problems</title>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>It's not working; how can I figure out what's wrong?</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The best solution to solving installation and
|
||
configuration issues is to take preventative measures by setting
|
||
up logging files beforehand. The log files provide a
|
||
source of hints and information that can be used to figure out
|
||
what went wrong and how to fix the problem.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>Incrementing and Changing the Serial Number</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Zone serial numbers are just numbers-they aren't date
|
||
related. A lot of people set them to a number that represents a
|
||
date, usually of the form YYYYMMDDRR. A number of people have been
|
||
testing these numbers for Y2K compliance and have set the number
|
||
to the year 2000 to see if it will work. They then try to restore
|
||
the old serial number. This will cause problems because serial
|
||
numbers are used to indicate that a zone has been updated. If the
|
||
serial number on the slave server is lower than the serial number
|
||
on the master, the slave server will attempt to update its copy of
|
||
the zone.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>Setting the serial number to a lower number on the master
|
||
server than the slave server means that the slave will not perform
|
||
updates to its copy of the zone.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The solution to this is to add 2147483647 (2^31-1) to the
|
||
number, reload the zone and make sure all slaves have updated to
|
||
the new zone serial number, then reset the number to what you want
|
||
it to be, and reload the zone again.</para>
|
||
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>Where Can I Get Help?</title>
|
||
|
||
<para>The Internet Software Consortium (<acronym>ISC</acronym>) offers a wide range
|
||
of support and service agreements for <acronym>BIND</acronym> and <acronym>DHCP</acronym> servers. Four
|
||
levels of premium support are available and each level includes
|
||
support for all <acronym>ISC</acronym> programs, significant discounts on products
|
||
and training, and a recognized priority on bug fixes and
|
||
non-funded feature requests. In addition, <acronym>ISC</acronym> offers a standard
|
||
support agreement package which includes services ranging from bug
|
||
fix announcements to remote support. It also includes training in
|
||
<acronym>BIND</acronym> and <acronym>DHCP</acronym>.</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>To discuss arrangements for support, contact
|
||
<ulink url="mailto:info@isc.org">info@isc.org</ulink> or visit the
|
||
<acronym>ISC</acronym> web page at <ulink
|
||
url="http://www.isc.org/services/support/">http://www.isc.org/services/support/</ulink>
|
||
to read more.</para>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
</chapter>
|
||
<appendix id="ch09">
|
||
<title>Appendices</title>
|
||
<sect1>
|
||
<title>Acknowledgments</title>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>A Brief History of the <acronym>DNS</acronym> and <acronym>BIND</acronym></title>
|
||
|
||
<para>Although the "official" beginning of the Domain Name
|
||
System occurred in 1984 with the publication of RFC 920, the
|
||
core of the new system was described in 1983 in RFCs 882 and
|
||
883. From 1984 to 1987, the ARPAnet (the precursor to today's
|
||
Internet) became a testbed of experimentation for developing the
|
||
new naming/addressing scheme in an rapidly expanding,
|
||
operational network environment. New RFCs were written and
|
||
published in 1987 that modified the original documents to
|
||
incorporate improvements based on the working model. RFC 1034,
|
||
"Domain Names-Concepts and Facilities", and RFC 1035, "Domain
|
||
Names-Implementation and Specification" were published and
|
||
became the standards upon which all <acronym>DNS</acronym> implementations are
|
||
built.
|
||
</para>
|
||
|
||
<para>The first working domain name server, called "Jeeves", was
|
||
written in 1983-84 by Paul Mockapetris for operation on DEC Tops-20
|
||
machines located at the University of Southern California's Information
|
||
Sciences Institute (USC-ISI) and SRI International's Network Information
|
||
Center (SRI-NIC). A <acronym>DNS</acronym> server for Unix machines, the Berkeley Internet
|
||
Name Domain (<acronym>BIND</acronym>) package, was written soon after by a group of
|
||
graduate students at the University of California at Berkeley under
|
||
a grant from the US Defense Advanced Research Projects Administration
|
||
(DARPA). Versions of <acronym>BIND</acronym> through 4.8.3 were maintained by the Computer
|
||
Systems Research Group (CSRG) at UC Berkeley. Douglas Terry, Mark
|
||
Painter, David Riggle and Songnian Zhou made up the initial <acronym>BIND</acronym>
|
||
project team. After that, additional work on the software package
|
||
was done by Ralph Campbell. Kevin Dunlap, a Digital Equipment Corporation
|
||
employee on loan to the CSRG, worked on <acronym>BIND</acronym> for 2 years, from 1985
|
||
to 1987. Many other people also contributed to <acronym>BIND</acronym> development
|
||
during that time: Doug Kingston, Craig Partridge, Smoot Carl-Mitchell,
|
||
Mike Muuss, Jim Bloom and Mike Schwartz. <acronym>BIND</acronym> maintenance was subsequently
|
||
handled by Mike Karels and O. Kure.</para>
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> versions 4.9 and 4.9.1 were released by Digital Equipment
|
||
Corporation (now Compaq Computer Corporation). Paul Vixie, then
|
||
a DEC employee, became <acronym>BIND</acronym>'s primary caretaker. Paul was assisted
|
||
by Phil Almquist, Robert Elz, Alan Barrett, Paul Albitz, Bryan Beecher, Andrew
|
||
Partan, Andy Cherenson, Tom Limoncelli, Berthold Paffrath, Fuat
|
||
Baran, Anant Kumar, Art Harkin, Win Treese, Don Lewis, Christophe
|
||
Wolfhugel, and others.</para>
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> Version 4.9.2 was sponsored by Vixie Enterprises. Paul
|
||
Vixie became <acronym>BIND</acronym>'s principal architect/programmer.</para>
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> versions from 4.9.3 onward have been developed and maintained
|
||
by the Internet Software Consortium with support being provided
|
||
by ISC's sponsors. As co-architects/programmers, Bob Halley and
|
||
Paul Vixie released the first production-ready version of <acronym>BIND</acronym> version
|
||
8 in May 1997.</para>
|
||
<para><acronym>BIND</acronym> development work is made possible today by the sponsorship
|
||
of several corporations, and by the tireless work efforts of numerous
|
||
individuals.</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1 id="historical_dns_information">
|
||
|
||
<title>General <acronym>DNS</acronym> Reference Information</title>
|
||
<sect2 id="ipv6addresses">
|
||
<title>IPv6 addresses (AAAA)</title>
|
||
<para>IPv6 addresses are 128-bit identifiers for interfaces and
|
||
sets of interfaces which were introduced in the <acronym>DNS</acronym> to facilitate
|
||
scalable Internet routing. There are three types of addresses: <emphasis>Unicast</emphasis>,
|
||
an identifier for a single interface; <emphasis>Anycast</emphasis>,
|
||
an identifier for a set of interfaces; and <emphasis>Multicast</emphasis>,
|
||
an identifier for a set of interfaces. Here we describe the global
|
||
Unicast address scheme. For more information, see RFC 2374.</para>
|
||
<para>The aggregatable global Unicast address format is as follows:</para>
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup cols = "6"
|
||
colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "1Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.477in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.501in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "3" colnum = "3" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.523in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "4" colnum = "4" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.731in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "5" colnum = "5" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.339in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "6" colnum = "6" colsep = "0" colwidth = "2.529in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1" colsep = "1" rowsep = "1"><para>3</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2" colsep = "1" rowsep = "1"><para>13</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3" colsep = "1" rowsep = "1"><para>8</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4" colsep = "1" rowsep = "1"><para>24</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5" colsep = "1" rowsep = "1"><para>16</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "6" rowsep = "1"><para>64 bits</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1" colsep = "1"><para>FP</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2" colsep = "1"><para>TLA ID</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3" colsep = "1"><para>RES</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4" colsep = "1"><para>NLA ID</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5" colsep = "1"><para>SLA ID</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "6"><para>Interface ID</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry nameend = "4" namest = "1"><para><------ Public Topology
|
||
------></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "6"><para></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para><-Site Topology-></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "6"><para></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "4"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "5"><para></para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "6"><para><------ Interface Identifier ------></para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable>
|
||
<para>Where
|
||
<informaltable colsep = "0" rowsep = "0"><tgroup
|
||
cols = "3" colsep = "0" rowsep = "0" tgroupstyle = "2Level-table">
|
||
<colspec colname = "1" colnum = "1" colsep = "0" colwidth = "1.375in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "2" colnum = "2" colsep = "0" colwidth = "0.250in"/>
|
||
<colspec colname = "3" colnum = "3" colsep = "0" colwidth = "3.500in"/>
|
||
<tbody>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>FP</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>=</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>Format Prefix (001)</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>TLA ID</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>=</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>Top-Level Aggregation Identifier</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>RES</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>=</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>Reserved for future use</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>NLA ID</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>=</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>Next-Level Aggregation Identifier</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>SLA ID</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>=</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>Site-Level Aggregation Identifier</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row rowsep = "0">
|
||
<entry colname = "1"><para>INTERFACE ID</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "2"><para>=</para></entry>
|
||
<entry colname = "3"><para>Interface Identifier</para></entry>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</tbody>
|
||
</tgroup></informaltable></para>
|
||
<para>The <emphasis>Public Topology</emphasis> is provided by the
|
||
upstream provider or ISP, and (roughly) corresponds to the IPv4 <emphasis>network</emphasis> section
|
||
of the address range. The <emphasis>Site Topology</emphasis> is
|
||
where you can subnet this space, much the same as subnetting an
|
||
IPv4 /16 network into /24 subnets. The <emphasis>Interface Identifier</emphasis> is
|
||
the address of an individual interface on a given network. (With
|
||
IPv6, addresses belong to interfaces rather than machines.)</para>
|
||
<para>The subnetting capability of IPv6 is much more flexible than
|
||
that of IPv4: subnetting can now be carried out on bit boundaries,
|
||
in much the same way as Classless InterDomain Routing (CIDR).</para>
|
||
<para>The Interface Identifier must be unique on that network. On
|
||
ethernet networks, one way to ensure this is to set the address
|
||
to the first three bytes of the hardware address, "FFFE", then the
|
||
last three bytes of the hardware address. The lowest significant
|
||
bit of the first byte should then be complemented. Addresses are
|
||
written as 32-bit blocks separated with a colon, and leading zeros
|
||
of a block may be omitted, for example:</para>
|
||
<para><command>2001:db8:201:9:a00:20ff:fe81:2b32</command></para>
|
||
<para>IPv6 address specifications are likely to contain long strings
|
||
of zeros, so the architects have included a shorthand for specifying
|
||
them. The double colon (`::') indicates the longest possible string
|
||
of zeros that can fit, and can be used only once in an address.</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
<sect1 id="bibliography">
|
||
<title>Bibliography (and Suggested Reading)</title>
|
||
<sect2 id="rfcs">
|
||
<title>Request for Comments (RFCs)</title>
|
||
<para>Specification documents for the Internet protocol suite, including
|
||
the <acronym>DNS</acronym>, are published as part of the Request for Comments (RFCs)
|
||
series of technical notes. The standards themselves are defined
|
||
by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) and the Internet Engineering
|
||
Steering Group (IESG). RFCs can be obtained online via FTP at
|
||
<ulink url="ftp://www.isi.edu/in-notes/">ftp://www.isi.edu/in-notes/RFC<replaceable>xxx</replaceable>.txt</ulink> (where <replaceable>xxx</replaceable> is
|
||
the number of the RFC). RFCs are also available via the Web at
|
||
<ulink url="http://www.ietf.org/rfc/">http://www.ietf.org/rfc/</ulink>.
|
||
</para>
|
||
<bibliography>
|
||
<bibliodiv>
|
||
<!-- one of (BIBLIOENTRY BIBLIOMIXED) -->
|
||
<title>Standards</title>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC974</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Partridge</surname>
|
||
<firstname>C.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Mail Routing and the Domain System</title>
|
||
<pubdate>January 1986</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1034</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Mockapetris</surname>
|
||
<firstname>P.V.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Domain Names — Concepts and Facilities</title>
|
||
<pubdate>November 1987</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1035</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Mockapetris</surname>
|
||
<firstname>P. V.</firstname>
|
||
</author> <title>Domain Names — Implementation and
|
||
Specification</title>
|
||
<pubdate>November 1987</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliodiv>
|
||
<bibliodiv id="proposed_standards" xreflabel="Proposed Standards">
|
||
|
||
<title>Proposed Standards</title>
|
||
<!-- one of (BIBLIOENTRY BIBLIOMIXED) -->
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2181</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Elz</surname>
|
||
<firstname>R., R. Bush</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Clarifications to the <acronym>DNS</acronym> Specification</title>
|
||
<pubdate>July 1997</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2308</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Andrews</surname>
|
||
<firstname>M.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Negative Caching of <acronym>DNS</acronym> Queries</title>
|
||
<pubdate>March 1998</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1995</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Ohta</surname>
|
||
<firstname>M.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Incremental Zone Transfer in <acronym>DNS</acronym></title>
|
||
<pubdate>August 1996</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1996</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Vixie</surname>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>A Mechanism for Prompt Notification of Zone Changes</title>
|
||
<pubdate>August 1996</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2136</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Vixie</surname>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>S.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Thomson</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>Y.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Rekhter</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>J.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Bound</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Dynamic Updates in the Domain Name System</title>
|
||
<pubdate>April 1997</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2845</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Vixie</surname>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>O.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Gudmundsson</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>D.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Eastlake</surname>
|
||
<lineage>3rd</lineage></author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>B.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Wellington</surname>
|
||
</author></authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Secret Key Transaction Authentication for <acronym>DNS</acronym> (TSIG)</title>
|
||
<pubdate>May 2000</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliodiv>
|
||
<bibliodiv>
|
||
<title>Proposed Standards Still Under Development</title>
|
||
<note>
|
||
<para><emphasis>Note:</emphasis> the following list of
|
||
RFCs are undergoing major revision by the IETF.</para>
|
||
</note>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1886</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Thomson</surname>
|
||
<firstname>S.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>C.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Huitema</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Extensions to support IP version 6</title>
|
||
<pubdate>December 1995</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2065</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Eastlake</surname>
|
||
<lineage>3rd</lineage>
|
||
<firstname>D.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>C.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Kaufman</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Domain Name System Security Extensions</title>
|
||
<pubdate>January 1997</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2137</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Eastlake</surname>
|
||
<lineage>3rd</lineage>
|
||
<firstname>D.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Secure Domain Name System Dynamic Update</title>
|
||
<pubdate>April 1997</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliodiv>
|
||
<bibliodiv>
|
||
<title>Other Important RFCs About <acronym>DNS</acronym> Implementation</title>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1535</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Gavron</surname>
|
||
<firstname>E.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>A Security Problem and Proposed Correction With Widely Deployed <acronym>DNS</acronym> Software.</title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1993</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1536</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Kumar</surname>
|
||
<firstname>A.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>J.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Postel</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>C.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Neuman</surname></author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Danzig</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>S.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Miller</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Common <acronym>DNS</acronym> Implementation Errors and Suggested Fixes</title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1993</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1982</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Elz</surname>
|
||
<firstname>R.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>R.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Bush</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Serial Number Arithmetic</title>
|
||
<pubdate>August 1996</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliodiv>
|
||
<bibliodiv>
|
||
<title>Resource Record Types</title>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1183</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Everhart</surname>
|
||
<firstname>C.F.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>L. A.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Mamakos</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>R.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Ullmann</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Mockapetris</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>New <acronym>DNS</acronym> RR Definitions</title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1990</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1706</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Manning</surname>
|
||
<firstname>B.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>R.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Colella</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title><acronym>DNS</acronym> NSAP Resource Records</title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1994</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2168</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Daniel</surname>
|
||
<firstname>R.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>M.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Mealling</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Resolution of Uniform Resource Identifiers using
|
||
the Domain Name System</title>
|
||
<pubdate>June 1997</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1876</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Davis</surname>
|
||
<firstname>C.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Vixie</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>T.</firstname>
|
||
<firstname>Goodwin</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>I.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Dickinson</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>A Means for Expressing Location Information in the Domain
|
||
Name System</title>
|
||
<pubdate>January 1996</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2052</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Gulbrandsen</surname>
|
||
<firstname>A.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Vixie</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>A <acronym>DNS</acronym> RR for Specifying the Location of
|
||
Services.</title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1996</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2163</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Allocchio</surname>
|
||
<firstname>A.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Using the Internet <acronym>DNS</acronym> to Distribute MIXER
|
||
Conformant Global Address Mapping</title>
|
||
<pubdate>January 1998</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2230</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Atkinson</surname>
|
||
<firstname>R.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Key Exchange Delegation Record for the <acronym>DNS</acronym></title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1997</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliodiv>
|
||
<bibliodiv>
|
||
<title><acronym>DNS</acronym> and the Internet</title>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1101</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Mockapetris</surname>
|
||
<firstname>P. V.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Encoding of Network Names and Other Types</title>
|
||
<pubdate>April 1989</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1123</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Braden</surname>
|
||
<surname>R.</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Requirements for Internet Hosts - Application and Support</title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1989</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1591</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Postel</surname>
|
||
<firstname>J.</firstname></author>
|
||
<title>Domain Name System Structure and Delegation</title>
|
||
<pubdate>March 1994</pubdate></biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2317</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Eidnes</surname>
|
||
<firstname>H.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>G.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>de Groot</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Vixie</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Classless IN-ADDR.ARPA Delegation</title>
|
||
<pubdate>March 1998</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliodiv>
|
||
<bibliodiv>
|
||
<title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Operations</title>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1537</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Beertema</surname>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Common <acronym>DNS</acronym> Data File Configuration Errors</title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1993</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1912</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Barr</surname>
|
||
<firstname>D.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Common <acronym>DNS</acronym> Operational and Configuration Errors</title>
|
||
<pubdate>February 1996</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2010</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Manning</surname>
|
||
<firstname>B.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>P.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Vixie</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Operational Criteria for Root Name Servers.</title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1996</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2219</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Hamilton</surname>
|
||
<firstname>M.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>R.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Wright</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Use of <acronym>DNS</acronym> Aliases for Network Services.</title>
|
||
<pubdate>October 1997</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliodiv>
|
||
<bibliodiv>
|
||
<title>Other <acronym>DNS</acronym>-related RFCs</title>
|
||
<note>
|
||
<para>Note: the following list of RFCs, although
|
||
<acronym>DNS</acronym>-related, are not concerned with implementing software.</para>
|
||
</note>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1464</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Rosenbaum</surname>
|
||
<firstname>R.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Using the Domain Name System To Store Arbitrary String Attributes</title>
|
||
<pubdate>May 1993</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1713</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Romao</surname>
|
||
<firstname>A.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>Tools for <acronym>DNS</acronym> Debugging</title>
|
||
<pubdate>November 1994</pubdate></biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1794</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Brisco</surname>
|
||
<firstname>T.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Support for Load Balancing</title>
|
||
<pubdate>April 1995</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2240</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Vaughan</surname>
|
||
<firstname>O.</firstname></author>
|
||
<title>A Legal Basis for Domain Name Allocation</title>
|
||
<pubdate>November 1997</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2345</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Klensin</surname>
|
||
<firstname>J.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>T.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Wolf</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>G.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Oglesby</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title>Domain Names and Company Name Retrieval</title>
|
||
<pubdate>May 1998</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC2352</abbrev>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Vaughan</surname>
|
||
<firstname>O.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<title>A Convention For Using Legal Names as Domain Names</title>
|
||
<pubdate>May 1998</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliodiv>
|
||
<bibliodiv>
|
||
<title>Obsolete and Unimplemented Experimental RRs</title>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<abbrev>RFC1712</abbrev>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Farrell</surname>
|
||
<firstname>C.</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>M.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Schulze</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>S.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Pleitner</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>D.</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Baldoni</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title><acronym>DNS</acronym> Encoding of Geographical
|
||
Location</title>
|
||
<pubdate>November 1994</pubdate>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliodiv>
|
||
</bibliography>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2 id="internet_drafts">
|
||
<title>Internet Drafts</title>
|
||
<para>Internet Drafts (IDs) are rough-draft working documents of
|
||
the Internet Engineering Task Force. They are, in essence, RFCs
|
||
in the preliminary stages of development. Implementors are cautioned not
|
||
to regard IDs as archival, and they should not be quoted or cited
|
||
in any formal documents unless accompanied by the disclaimer that
|
||
they are "works in progress." IDs have a lifespan of six months
|
||
after which they are deleted unless updated by their authors.
|
||
</para>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
<sect2>
|
||
<title>Other Documents About <acronym>BIND</acronym></title>
|
||
<para></para>
|
||
<bibliography>
|
||
<biblioentry>
|
||
<authorgroup>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<surname>Albitz</surname>
|
||
<firstname>Paul</firstname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
<author>
|
||
<firstname>Cricket</firstname>
|
||
<surname>Liu</surname>
|
||
</author>
|
||
</authorgroup>
|
||
<title><acronym>DNS</acronym> and <acronym>BIND</acronym></title>
|
||
<copyright>
|
||
<year>1998</year>
|
||
<holder>Sebastopol, CA: O'Reilly and Associates</holder>
|
||
</copyright>
|
||
</biblioentry>
|
||
</bibliography>
|
||
</sect2>
|
||
</sect1>
|
||
|
||
</appendix>
|
||
|
||
</book>
|